path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt

LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
1 About this document
2 Overview of LaTeX
3 Document classes
4 Fonts
5 Layout
6 Sectioning
7 Cross references
8 Environments
9 Line breaking
10 Page breaking
11 Footnotes
12 Definitions
13 Counters
14 Lengths
15 Making paragraphs
16 Math formulas
17 Modes
18 Page styles
19 Spaces
20 Boxes
21 Color
22 Graphics
23 Special insertions
24 Splitting the input
25 Front/back matter
26 Letters
27 Terminal input/output
28 Command line
Appendix A Document templates
Concept Index
Command Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
1 About this document
2 Overview of LaTeX
  2.1 Starting and ending
  2.2 Output files
  2.3 TeX engines
  2.4 LaTeX command syntax
    2.4.1 Environments
    2.4.2 Command declarations
    2.4.3 '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'
      2.4.3.1 '\@ifstar'
3 Document classes
  3.1 Document class options
  3.2 Additional packages
  3.3 Class and package construction
    3.3.1 Class and package structure
    3.3.2 Class and package commands
4 Fonts
  4.1 Font styles
  4.2 Font sizes
  4.3 Low-level font commands
5 Layout
  5.1 '\onecolumn'
  5.2 '\twocolumn'
  5.3 '\flushbottom'
  5.4 '\raggedbottom'
  5.5 Page layout parameters
  5.6 Floats
6 Sectioning
  6.1 '\@startsection'
7 Cross references
  7.1 '\label'
  7.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
  7.3 '\ref{KEY}'
8 Environments
  8.1 'abstract'
  8.2 'array'
  8.3 'center'
    8.3.1 '\centering'
  8.4 'description'
  8.5 'displaymath'
  8.6 'document'
    8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
    8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
  8.7 'enumerate'
  8.8 'eqnarray'
  8.9 'equation'
  8.10 'figure'
  8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
  8.12 'flushleft'
    8.12.1 '\raggedright'
  8.13 'flushright'
    8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
  8.14 'itemize'
  8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
  8.16 'list'
    8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
    8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
  8.17 'math'
  8.18 'minipage'
  8.19 'picture'
    8.19.1 '\circle'
    8.19.2 '\makebox'
    8.19.3 '\framebox'
    8.19.4 '\dashbox'
    8.19.5 '\frame'
    8.19.6 '\line'
    8.19.7 '\linethickness'
    8.19.8 '\thicklines'
    8.19.9 '\thinlines'
    8.19.10 '\multiput'
    8.19.11 '\oval'
    8.19.12 '\put'
    8.19.13 '\shortstack'
    8.19.14 '\vector'
  8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
  8.21 'tabbing'
  8.22 'table'
  8.23 'tabular'
    8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
    8.23.2 '\vline'
    8.23.3 '\cline'
    8.23.4 '\hline'
  8.24 'thebibliography'
    8.24.1 '\bibitem'
    8.24.2 '\cite'
    8.24.3 '\nocite'
    8.24.4 Using BibTeX
  8.25 'theorem'
  8.26 'titlepage'
  8.27 'verbatim'
    8.27.1 '\verb'
  8.28 'verse'
9 Line breaking
  9.1 '\\'
  9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
  9.3 '\newline'
  9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
  9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
  9.6 '\fussy'
  9.7 '\sloppy'
  9.8 '\hyphenation'
  9.9 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
10 Page breaking
  10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
  10.2 '\clearpage'
  10.3 '\newpage'
  10.4 '\enlargethispage'
  10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
11 Footnotes
  11.1 '\footnote'
  11.2 '\footnotemark'
  11.3 '\footnotetext'
  11.4 Footnotes in a table
  11.5 Footnotes in section headings
  11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
  11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
  11.8 Footnote parameters
12 Definitions
  12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
  12.2 '\providecommand'
  12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
  12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
  12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
  12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
  12.7 '\newtheorem'
  12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
  12.9 '\protect'
  12.10 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
13 Counters
  13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
  13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
  13.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
  13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
  13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
  13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
  13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
  13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
14 Lengths
  14.1 Units of length
  14.2 '\setlength'
  14.3 '\addtolength'
  14.4 '\settodepth'
  14.5 '\settoheight'
  14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
  14.7 Predefined lengths
15 Making paragraphs
  15.1 '\indent'
  15.2 '\noindent'
  15.3 '\parskip'
  15.4 Marginal notes
16 Math formulas
  16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
  16.2 Math symbols
  16.3 Math functions
  16.4 Math accents
  16.5 Spacing in math mode
  16.6 Math miscellany
17 Modes
  17.1 '\ensuremath'
18 Page styles
  18.1 '\maketitle'
  18.2 '\pagenumbering'
  18.3 '\pagestyle'
  18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
19 Spaces
  19.1 '\hspace'
  19.2 '\hfill'
  19.3 '\spacefactor'
    19.3.1 '\(SPACE)' and '\@'
    19.3.2 '\frenchspacing'
    19.3.3 '\normalsfcodes'
  19.4 '\ ' after control sequence
  19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
  19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
  19.7 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
  19.8 '\addvspace'
  19.9 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
  19.10 '\vfill'
  19.11 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
20 Boxes
  20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
  20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
  20.3 'lrbox'
  20.4 '\makebox'
  20.5 '\parbox'
  20.6 '\raisebox'
  20.7 '\savebox'
  20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
  20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}'
21 Color
  21.1 Color package options
  21.2 Color models
  21.3 Commands for color
    21.3.1 Define colors
    21.3.2 Colored text
    21.3.3 Colored boxes
    21.3.4 Colored pages
22 Graphics
  22.1 Graphics package options
  22.2 Graphics package configuration
    22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
    22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
    22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
  22.3 Commands for graphics
    22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
    22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
    22.3.3 '\scalebox'
    22.3.4 '\resizebox'
23 Special insertions
  23.1 Reserved characters
  23.2 Upper and lower case
  23.3 Symbols by font position
  23.4 Text symbols
  23.5 Accents
  23.6 Additional Latin letters
  23.7 '\rule'
  23.8 '\today'
24 Splitting the input
  24.1 '\include'
  24.2 '\includeonly'
  24.3 '\input'
25 Front/back matter
  25.1 Tables of contents
    25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
    25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
  25.2 Glossaries
  25.3 Indexes
26 Letters
  26.1 '\address'
  26.2 '\cc'
  26.3 '\closing'
  26.4 '\encl'
  26.5 '\location'
  26.6 '\makelabels'
  26.7 '\name'
  26.8 '\opening'
  26.9 '\ps'
  26.10 '\signature'
  26.11 '\telephone'
27 Terminal input/output
  27.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
  27.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
28 Command line
Appendix A Document templates
  A.1 'beamer' template
  A.2 'book' template
  A.3 'tugboat' template
Concept Index
Command Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************

This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of March 2018)
for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.

1 About this document
*********************

This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
program (*note Overview::).  This document's home page is
<http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/>.  That page has links
to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives
and subscriptions, and other infrastructure.

   In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
ago.

   LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
(<http://latex-project.org>).  The official documentation written by the
LaTeX project is available from their web site.  This document is
completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
maintainers.  Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
document to them.  Instead, please send all comments to
<latexrefman@tug.org>.

   This document is a reference.  There is a vast array of other sources
of information about LaTeX, at all levels.  Here are a few
introductions.

<http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
     Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.

<http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
     Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.

<http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
     The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
     Many other guides by many other people are also available,
     independent of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:

<http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
     A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.

<http://tug.org/begin.html>
     Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
     references.

2 Overview of LaTeX
*******************

LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents.  It was originally created
by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
(<http://latex-project.org>).  It is widely used, particularly for
complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.

   A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with
interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
should be formatted.  It is implemented as a set of related commands
that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
TeX engine.

   The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
available to a LaTeX user.

   The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX".  It is pronounced LAH-teck
or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks.  Inside a document, produce the
logo with '\LaTeX'.  Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.

2.1 Starting and ending
=======================

LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
and ending.  Here is a "hello, world" example:

     \documentclass{article}
     \begin{document}
     Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
     \end{document}

Here, the 'article' is the so-called "document class", implemented in a
file 'article.cls'.  Any document class can be used.  A few document
classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of others are widely
available.  *Note Document classes::.

   You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
the '\begin{document}' commands.  This area is called the "preamble".

   The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' is a so-called
"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
all LaTeX documents (*note document::).  LaTeX provides many
environments itself, and many more are defined separately.  *Note
Environments::.

   The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
from a LaTeX input file.

2.2 Output files
================

LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two accessory files.  The
main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.

'.dvi'
     If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'latex' then it
     produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension '.dvi'.  You can
     view this file with a command such as 'xdvi', or convert it to a
     PostScript '.ps' file with 'dvips' or to a Portable Document Format
     '.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'.  The contents of the file can be
     dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'.  A vast array of
     other DVI utility programs are available
     (<http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).

'.pdf'
     If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
     commands (*note TeX engines::), then the main output is a Portable
     Document Format (PDF) file.  Typically this is a self-contained
     file, with all fonts and images included.

   LaTeX also produces at least two additional files.

'.log'
     This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
     loaded packages.  It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
     additional information for any errors.

'.aux'
     Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross
     references.  For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward
     reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
     in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question
     mark '??'.  When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
     source then LaTeX writes its location information to this '.aux'
     file.  On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information
     from this file and uses it to resolve the reference, replacing the
     double question mark with the remembered location.

   LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
ending.  These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of
figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file
used to make a table of contents.  A particular class may create others;
the list is open-ended.

2.3 TeX engines
===============

LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
implementation (*note Overview::).  This section gives a terse overview
of the main programs.

'latex'
'pdflatex'
     In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
     either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
     engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>).  When invoked as
     'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
     output is a '.pdf' file.

     pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
     program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
     programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
     of extensions of its own.  e-TeX is available on its own as the
     system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').

     In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
     pdfTeX.  In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
     available in LaTeX.

'lualatex'
     If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX
     engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>).  This program allows
     code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
     interact with TeX's typesetting.  LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
     input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
     produces a '.pdf' file by default.  There is also 'dvilualatex' to
     produce a '.dvi' file, but this is rarely used.

'xelatex'
     If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
     engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>).  Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
     natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
     though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
     external libraries instead of internal code.  XeTeX produces a
     '.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.

     Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
     translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
     process is automatic.  The '.xdv' file is only useful for
     debugging.

   Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).

2.4 LaTeX command syntax
========================

In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
character, '\'.  The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
letters or (b) a single non-letter.

   LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command).  Most commands
are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
case as they are defined.

   A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments.  These
arguments may be either required or optional.  Required arguments are
contained in curly braces, '{...}'.  Optional arguments are contained in
square brackets, '[...]'.  Generally, but not universally, if the
command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
required arguments.

   Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
{]}]'.  Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.

   LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.

   This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).

2.4.1 Environments
------------------

Synopsis:

     \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
       ...
     \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}

   An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
behavior.  For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.

     \begin{verse}
       There once was a man from Nantucket \\
       ...
     \end{verse}

   See *note Environments:: for a list of environments.

   The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
end.  This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.

   Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments.  This
example produces a table.  The first argument is optional (and causes
the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
required (it specifies the formatting of columns).

     \begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
       ... rows of table ...
     \end{tabular}

2.4.2 Command declarations
--------------------------

A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
command or parameter.  For instance, the '\mainmatter' command changes
the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.

2.4.3 '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'
----------------------------------------

Synopsis:

     \makeatletter
       ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
     \makeatother

   Used to redefine internal LaTeX commands.  '\makeatletter' makes the
at-sign character '@' have the category code of a letter, 11.
'\makeatother' sets the category code of '@' to 12, its original value.

   As each character is read by TeX for LaTeX, it is assigned a
character category code, or "catcode" for short.  For instance, the
backslash '\' is assigned the catcode 0, for characters that start a
command.  These two commands alter the catcode assigned to '@'.

   The alteration is needed because many of LaTeX's commands use '@' in
their name, to prevent users from accidentally defining a command that
replaces one of LaTeX's own.  Command names consist of a category 0
character, ordinarily backslash, followed by letters, category 11
characters (except that a command name can also consist of a category 0
character followed by a single non-letter symbol).  So under the default
category codes, user-defined commands cannot contain an '@'.  But
'\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' allow users to define or redefine
commands named with '@'.

   Use these two commands inside a '.tex' file, in the preamble, when
defining or redefining a command with '@' in its name.  Don't use them
inside '.sty' or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and
'\documentclass' commands set the at sign to have the character code of
a letter.

   For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
<http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.  These macros are mainly intended to
package or class authors.

   The example below is typical.  In the user's class file is a command
'\thesis@universityname'.  The user wants to change the definition.
These three lines should go in the preamble, before the
'\begin{document}'.

     \makeatletter
     \renewcommand{\thesis@universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
     \makeatother

2.4.3.1 '\@ifstar'
..................

Synopsis:

     \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}}
     \newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[NON-STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF NON-STARRED COMMAND}
     \newcommand{\mycmd@star}[STARRED COMMAND NUMBER OF ARGS]{BODY OF STARRED COMMAND}

   Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk.  Examples
are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
'\section*' commands.

   When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
name to contain a star.  For commands the situation is more complex.  As
in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above
as '\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star.  For
instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
'\section' command peeks ahead.  This command does not accept arguments
but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments.  In
the synopsis these two are '\mycmd@nostar' and '\mycmd@star'.  They
could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
arguments at all.  As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
block (*note \makeatletter and \makeatother::).

   This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
'\ciel*'.  Both have one required argument.  A call to '\ciel{night}'
will return "starry night sky" while '\ciel*{blue}' will return "starry
not blue sky".

     \newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
     \newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
     \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}

   In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
arguments than does the unstarred one.  With this definition, Agent
007's '``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.'''
is equivalent to '``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James}
textsc{Bond}.'''

     \newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
     \newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
     \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}

   There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
of '\@ifstar'.  The 'suffix' package allows the construct
'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED VERSION}' followed by
'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED VERSION}'.  And LaTeX3 has
the 'xparse' package that allows this code.

     \NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
       {STARRED VERSION}%
       {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
       }

3 Document classes
******************

The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is
normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.

     \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}

   The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX.  (Many other
document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)

'article'
     For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general
     use.

'book'
     Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
     matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
     (*note Front/back matter::).

'letter'
     Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).

'report'
     For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
     technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.

'slides'
     For slide presentations--rarely used today.  In its place the
     'beamer' package is perhaps the most prevalent (*note beamer
     template::).

   Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.

3.1 Document class options
==========================

You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the
'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets.  To
specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma, as in:

     \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}

   Here is the list of the standard class options.

   All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following
options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):

     10pt  11pt  12pt

   All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
paper size (these show height by width):

'a4paper'
     210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)

'a5paper'
     148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)

'b5paper'
     176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)

'executivepaper'
     7.25 by 10.5 inches

'legalpaper'
     8.5 by 14 inches

'letterpaper'
     8.5 by 11 inches (the default)

   When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
you must also set the physical paper size.  One way to do that is to put
'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
document's preamble.

   The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of setting the print
area and physical page size.

   Miscellaneous other options:

'draft'
'final'
     Mark ('draft') or do not mark ('final') overfull boxes with a black
     box in the margin; default is 'final'.

'fleqn'
     Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.

'landscape'
     Selects landscape format; default is portrait.

'leqno'
     Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
     right side.

'openbib'
     Use "open" bibliography format.

'titlepage'
'notitlepage'
     Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title
     information and for the abstract also, if there is one.  The
     default for the 'report' class is 'titlepage', for the other
     classes it is 'notitlepage'.

   The following options are not available with the 'slides' class.

'onecolumn'
'twocolumn'
     Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'.

'oneside'
'twoside'
     Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except that
     in the 'book' class the default is 'twoside'.

     For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page.  For
     two-sided printing, the '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin')
     parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages
     between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with
     '\oddsidemargin' being 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth'
     and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is the remainder.

'openright'
'openany'
     Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
     is 'openright' for 'book', and 'openany' for 'report'.

   The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
the bottom of each note.

3.2 Additional packages
=======================

Load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
comma-separated list OPTIONS, as here.

     \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.

   To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage'
commands.

   Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown to
the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
'\usepackage'.

3.3 Class and package construction
==================================

You can create new document classes and new packages.  For instance, if
your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
header for each page, then you could create a new class 'smcmemo.cls'
and begin your documents with '\documentclass{smcmemo}'.

   What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
are specific to that class.  Thus, a command to set page headers is for
a package while a command to make the page headers say 'Memo from the
SMC Math Department' is for a class.

   Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
character in command names without having to surround the code
containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'.  *Note
\makeatletter and \makeatother::.  This allow you to create commands
that users will not accidentally redefine.  Another technique is to
preface class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent
your class or package from interfering with others.  For instance, the
class 'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc@tolist', '\smc@fromlist', etc.

3.3.1 Class and package structure
---------------------------------

A class file or package file typically has four parts.
     In the "identification part", the file says that it is a LaTeX
     package or class and describes itself, using the '\NeedsTeXFormat'
     and '\ProvidesClass' or '\ProvidesPackage' commands.
  1. The "preliminary declarations part" declares some commands and can
     also load other files.  Usually these commands will be those needed
     for the code used in the next part.  For example, an 'smcmemo'
     class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list
     of people for the to-head, as '\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}',
     and therefore needs to define a command
     '\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}' used in that file.
  2. In the "handle options part" the class or package declares and
     processes its options.  Class options allow a user to start their
     document as '\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}', to modify
     the behavior of the class.  An example is when you declare
     '\documentclass[11pt]{article}' to set the default document font
     size.
  3. Finally, in the "more declarations part" the class or package
     usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands
     and fonts, and loading other files.

   Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as 'stub.cls'
where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the '.tex'
file.

     \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
     \ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
     \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
     \ProcessOptions\relax
     \LoadClass{article}

   It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
class to provide the basis for this class's code.

   For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
Class Guide, at
<http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.

3.3.2 Class and package commands
--------------------------------

These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.

'\AtBeginDvi{specials}'
     Save in a box register things that are written to the '.dvi' file
     at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.

'\AtEndOfClass{CODE}'
'\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}'
     Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
     the current class or package.  You can use these hooks multiple
     times; the 'code' will be executed in the order that you called it.
     See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.

'\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
'\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
     Like '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
     not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
     CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not "long" as
     expected.  A long command is a command that accepts '\par' within
     an argument.  The CMD command is expected to be long with the
     unstarred version of '\CheckCommand'.  Raises an error when the
     check fails.  This allows you to check before you start redefining
     'cmd' yourself that no other package has already redefined this
     command.

'\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
'\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
'\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
'\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
'\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
'\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
'\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
'\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
'\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
'\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
     Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.

     For '\ClassError' and '\PackageError' the message is ERROR TEXT,
     followed by TeX's '?' error prompt.  If the user then asks for help
     by typing 'h', they see the HELP TEXT.

     The four warning commands are similar except that they write
     WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt.  The four info
     commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file.  The 'NoLine'
     versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
     while the other versions do show that number.

     To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use '\protect' to
     stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
     '\MessageBreak', and get a space with '\space' when a space
     character does not allow it, like after a command.  Note that LaTeX
     appends a period to the messages.

'\CurrentOption'
     Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option.  Can
     only be used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
     '\DeclareOption*'.

'\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
     Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their
     '\documentclass' command.  For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
     have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the
     first page with '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}'.  The class file
     must contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
     '\ProcessOptions').

     If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
     this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
     [badoption].' Change this behaviour with the starred version
     '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'.  For example, many classes extend an
     existing class, using a declaration such as '\LoadClass{article}',
     and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such
     as this.

          \DeclareOption*{%
          \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
          }

     Another example is that the class 'smcmemo' may allow users to keep
     lists of memo recipients in external files.  Then the user could
     invoke '\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}' and it will read the file
     'math.memo'.  This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
     passes the option to the 'article' class.

          \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
              \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}

'\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
'\DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
     Like '\newcommand' and '\newcommand*' (*note \newcommand &
     \renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
     code within the DEFINITION is fragile.  (For a discussion of robust
     and fragile commands *note \protect::.)  Use this command to define
     new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
     robust.  Unlike '\newcommand' these do not give an error if macro
     CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
     transcript file if a command is redefined.

     Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
     defined using '\newcommand' so unless the command's data is fragile
     and the command is used within a moving argument, use
     '\newcommand'.

     The 'etoolbox' package offers commands '\newrobustcmd',
     '\newrobustcmd*', '\renewrobustcmd', '\renewrobustcmd*',
     '\providerobustcmd', and '\providerobustcmd*' which are similar to
     '\newcommand', '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
     '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
     with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
       1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
          the higher level LaTeX '\protect' mechanism, so they do not
          incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
       2. They make the same distinction between '\new...', '\renew...',
          and '\provide...', as the standard commands, so they do not
          just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
          exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
          '\provide...' or you get an error.

'\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
'\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
     Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX can find the file 'FILE NAME' and FALSE
     CODE otherwise.  In the second case it inputs the file immediately
     after executing TRUE CODE.  Thus
     '\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING:
     img.pdf not found}}' will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is
     found but otherwise just give a warning.

     This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
     uses, not only in the current directory.  To look only in the
     current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
     CODE}{FALSE CODE}'.  If you ask for a filename without a '.tex'
     extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
     '.tex'; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
     \input::.

'\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
'\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
     Load a class, as with '\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
     NAME}[RELEASE INFO]'.  An example is
     '\LoadClass[twoside]{article}'.

     The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list.  The
     RELEASE DATE is optional.  If present it must have the form
     YYYY/MM/DD.

     If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
     on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
     in the log like 'You have requested, on input line 4, version
     `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version
     `2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available.'

     The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
     options for the current class.  This means it ignores any options
     passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'.  This is a convenience
     command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
     standard 'article' class, without having to track which options
     were passed.

'\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}'
     For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
     executes the command '\ds@OPTION'.  If this command is not defined
     then that option is silently ignored.

     It can be used to provide a default option list before
     '\ProcessOptions'.  For example, if in a class file you want the
     default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
     '\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax'.

'\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]'
     Specifies the format that this class must be run under.  Often
     issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
     '\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}'.  When a document using that class is
     processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
     actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
     sensitive).  If it does not match then execution stops with an
     error like 'This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.'

     To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
     features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
     were implemented.  If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
     If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
     FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested release
     `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is available.'

'\OptionNotUsed'
     Adds the current option to the list of unused options.  Can only be
     used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
     '\DeclareOption*'.

'\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}'
'\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}'
     Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
     options used by any future '\RequirePackage' or '\usepackage'
     command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.

     The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
     of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
     supply them when you first load the package.  Loading a package
     with options more than once will get you an error like 'Option
     clash for package foo.' (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
     conflict between the options.)

     If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
     collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
     '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}'
     with the single '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
     But if you are loading a package that in turn loads another package
     then you need to queue up the options you desire for this other
     package.  For instance, suppose the package 'foo' loads the package
     'geometry'.  Instead of
     '\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics}' you must
     write '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
     \RequirePackage{foo}'.  (If 'foo.sty' loads an option in conflict
     with what you want then you may have to look into altering its
     source.)

     These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
     package writers.  For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
     'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
     class 'foo' that loads the 'graphicx' package, but without that
     option.  The user could start their LaTeX file with
     '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}'.

'\ProcessOptions'
'\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS'
     Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
     Include it in the class file as '\ProcessOptions\relax' (because of
     the existence of the starred command).

     Options come in two types.  "Local options" have been specified for
     this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
     '\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}', '\usepackage[OPTIONS]', or
     '\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]'.  "Global options" are those given by
     the class user in '\documentclass[OPTIONS]' (If an option is
     specified both locally and globally then it is local.)

     When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a package 'pkg.sty', the
     following happens:
       1. For each option OPTION so far declared with '\DeclareOption',
          it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
          option for 'pkg'.  If so then it executes the declared code.
          This is done in the order in which these options were given in
          'pkg.sty'.
       2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
          '\ds@'OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
          '\DeclareOption'); otherwise, it executes the default option
          code given in '\DeclareOption*'.  If no default option code
          has been declared then it gives an error message.  This is
          done in the order in which these options were specified.

     When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a class it works in the same
     way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
     '\DeclareOption*' is '\OptionNotUsed' rather than an error.

     The starred version '\ProcessOptions*' executes the options in the
     order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
     of declaration in the class or package.  For a package this means
     that the global options are processed first.

'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
     Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
     and the log file.

     When a user writes '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then LaTeX loads the
     file 'smcmemo.cls'.  Similarly, a user writing '\usepackage{test}'
     prompts LaTeX to load the file 'test.sty'.  If the name of the file
     does not match the declared class or package name then you get a
     warning.  Thus, if you invoke '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the
     file 'smcmemo.cls' has the statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you
     get a warning like 'You have requested document class `smcmemo',
     but the document class provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not
     prevent LaTeX from processing the rest of the class file normally.

     If you include the optional argument, then you must include the
     date, before the first space if any, and it must have the form
     'YYYY/MM/DD'.  The rest of the optional argument is free-form,
     although it traditionally identifies the class, and is written to
     the screen during compilation and to the log file.  Thus, if your
     file 'smcmemo.cls' contains the line
     '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]' and your
     document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}' then you will
     see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class'.

     The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
     ask to be warned if the version of the class or package installed
     on their system is earlier than RELEASE DATE, by using the optional
     arguments such as '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
     '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]'.  (Note that package users only
     rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)

'\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
     Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
     configuration files or font definition files.  Put this command in
     that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
     2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILE NAME equal to
     'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
     config file for test.cls'.

'\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
'\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
     Load a package, like the document author command '\usepackage'.
     *Note Additional packages::.  An example is
     '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.  Note that the
     LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these commands
     over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide.

     The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list.  The
     RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD.  If the
     release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
     than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested,
     on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
     version `2000/01/01' is available'.

     The '\RequirePackageWithOptions' version uses the list of options
     for the current class.  This means it ignores any options passed to
     it via '\PassOptionsToClass'.  This is a convenience command to
     allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
     track which options were passed.

     The difference between '\usepackage' and '\RequirePackage' is
     small.  The '\usepackage' command is intended for the document file
     while '\RequirePackage' is intended for package and class files.
     Thus, using '\usepackage' before the '\documentclass' command
     causes LaTeX to give error like '\usepackage before
     \documentclass', but you can use '\RequirePackage' there.

4 Fonts
*******

Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a
style.  The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.

4.1 Font styles
===============

The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.

   This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as
in '\textit{TEXT}'.  In the table below, the corresponding command in
parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no arguments, as in
'{\itshape TEXT}'.  The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
next type style command or the end of the current group.

   These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
are cumulative; e.g., you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or
'\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif.

   You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations;
for instance, '\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.

   These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections
if needed.  (*Note \/::, for the details of italic corrections.)
Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following
character is in the list '\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a
period and a comma.  To suppress the automatic insertion of italic
correction, use '\nocorr' at the start or end of the command argument,
such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.

'\textrm (\rmfamily)'
     Roman.

'\textit (\itshape)'
     Italics.

'\textmd (\mdseries)'
     Medium weight (default).

'\textbf (\bfseries)'
     Boldface.

'\textup (\upshape)'
     Upright (default).

'\textsl (\slshape)'
     Slanted.

'\textsf (\sffamily)'
     Sans serif.

'\textsc (\scshape)'
     Small caps.

'\texttt (\ttfamily)'
     Typewriter.

'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
     Main document font.

   Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
substitute for '\textit'.  For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.

   LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative.  Also, they
are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD...}' instead of
'\CMD{...}'.  These are two unrelated constructs.

'\bf'
     Switch to bold face.

'\cal'
     Switch to calligraphic letters for math.

'\it'
     Italics.

'\rm'
     Roman.

'\sc'
     Small caps.

'\sf'
     Sans serif.

'\sl'
     Slanted (oblique).

'\tt'
     Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).

   The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.

   (Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
as '\tt', obsolete and that only the cumulative commands ('\texttt')
should be used.  Others think that both sets of commands have their
place and sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely what you
want; for one example, *note 'description': description.)

   The following commands are for use in math mode.  They are not
cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics.  This is because
typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
of the surrounding environment.

'\mathrm'
     Roman, for use in math mode.

'\mathbf'
     Boldface, for use in math mode.

'\mathsf'
     Sans serif, for use in math mode.

'\mathtt'
     Typewriter, for use in math mode.

'\mathit'
'(\mit)'
     Italics, for use in math mode.

'\mathnormal'
     For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.

'\mathcal'
     Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.

   In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.

   Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
the same height as uppercase letters.  LaTeX's default fonts support
this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern).  Many other fonts have
old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
default.  FAQ entry:
<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.

4.2 Font sizes
==============

The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX.  The
table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used
(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
respectively (*note Document class options::).

Command                   '10pt'  '11pt'  '12pt'
--------------------------------------------------
'\tiny'                   5       6       6
'\scriptsize'             7       8       8
'\footnotesize'           8       9       10
'\small'                  9       10      10.95
'\normalsize' (default)   10      10.95   12
'\large'                  12      12      14.4
'\Large'                  14.4    14.4    17.28
'\LARGE'                  17.28   17.28   20.74
'\huge'                   20.74   20.74   24.88
'\Huge'                   24.88   24.88   24.88

   The commands as listed here are "declaration forms".  The scope of
the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
of the current group.  You can also use the environment form of these
commands; for instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.

4.3 Low-level font commands
===========================

These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
packages.  The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.

'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
     Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font.  There
     are a large number of valid encodings.  The most common are 'OT1',
     Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
     'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
     accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
     (German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
     hyphenate words containing accented letters.  For more, see
     <https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide>.

'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
     Select the font family.  The web page
     <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
     through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX.  Here are
     examples of some common families:

     'pag'  Avant Garde
     'fvs'  Bitstream Vera Sans
     'pbk'  Bookman
     'bch'  Charter
     'ccr'  Computer Concrete
     'cmr'  Computer Modern
     'cmss' Computer Modern Sans Serif
     'cmtt' Computer Modern Typewriter
     'pcr'  Courier
     'phv'  Helvetica
     'fi4'  Inconsolata
     'lmr'  Latin Modern
     'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
     'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
     'pnc'  New Century Schoolbook
     'ppl'  Palatino
     'ptm'  Times
     'uncl' Uncial
     'put'  Utopia
     'pzc'  Zapf Chancery

'\fontseries{SERIES}'
     Select the font series.  A "series" combines a "weight" and a
     "width".  Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
     combinations.  Some common combined series values include:

     'm'  Medium (normal)
     'b'  Bold
     'c'  Condensed
     'bc' Bold condensed
     'bx' Bold extended

     The possible values for weight, individually, are:

     'ul' Ultra light
     'el' Extra light
     'l'  Light
     'sl' Semi light
     'm'  Medium (normal)
     'sb' Semi bold
     'b'  Bold
     'eb' Extra bold
     'ub' Ultra bold

     The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
     relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):

     'uc' Ultra condensed
     'ec' Extra condensed
     'c'  Condensed
     'sc' Semi condensed
     'm'  Medium
     'sx' Semi expanded
     'x'  Expanded
     'ex' Extra expanded
     'ux' Ultra expanded

     When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
     'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
     weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').

'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
     Select font shape.  Valid shapes are:

     'n'  Upright (normal)
     'it' Italic
     'sl' Slanted (oblique)
     'sc' Small caps
     'ui' Upright italics
     'ol' Outline

     The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
     small caps are often missing as well.

'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
     Set the font size and the line spacing.  The unit of both
     parameters defaults to points ('pt').  The line spacing is the
     nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline.  It is
     stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'.  The default
     '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
     '\fontsize'.  Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
     since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
     '\baselinestretch', next.

'\baselinestretch'
     LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
     '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1.  A change
     takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called.  You can
     make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for
     instance doubling it, by doing
     '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.

     However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
     'setspace' package.  In addition to offering a number of spacing
     options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
     places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
     figure captions.  See the package documentation.

'\linespread{FACTOR}'
     Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
     therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
     Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
     just described.

'\selectfont'
     The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
     until '\selectfont' is called, as in
     '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'.  It is often useful to put
     this in a macro:
     '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
     (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).

'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
     The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
     and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
     '\selectfont'.  For example:

          \usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}

5 Layout
********

Commands for controlling the general page layout.

5.1 '\onecolumn'
================

Start a new page and produce single-column output.  If the document is
given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
(*note Document class options::).

   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).

5.2 '\twocolumn'
================

Synopses:

     \twocolumn
     \twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]

   Start a new page and produce two-column output.  If the document is
given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
Document class options::).

   If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.

   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).

   These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:

'\columnsep'
     The distance between columns.  The default is 35pt.  Change it with
     a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
     before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
     place.

'\columnseprule'
     The width of the rule between columns.  The rule appears halfway
     between the two columns.  The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
     no rule.  Change it with a command such as
     '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
     environment starts.

'\columnwidth'
     The width of a single column.  In one-column mode this is equal to
     '\textwidth'.  In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
     of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
     '\columnsep'.

   In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
table::).  LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page.  The
following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.

'\dbltopfraction'
     The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
     occupied by two-column wide floats.  The default is 0.7, meaning
     that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
     exceed '0.7\textheight' .  If the height of your starred float
     environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
     actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
     document:

        * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
          the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
          a page.

        * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
          '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.

        * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
          number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.

     You can redefine it, for instance with
     '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.

'\dblfloatpagefraction'
     For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
     fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
     blank space.  LaTeX's default is '0.5'.  Change it with
     '\renewcommand'.

'\dblfloatsep'
     On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
     distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
     The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
     or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
     '12pt'.

'\dbltextfloatsep'
     This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
     or bottom of a page and the main text.  The default is '20pt
     plus2pt minus4pt'.

'\dbltopnumber'
     On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
     maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page.  The LaTeX
     default is '2'.

   This example uses '\twocolumn''s optional argument of to create a
title that spans the two-column article:

     \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
     \newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
     \begin{document}
     \twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
       \centering
       \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
       \large Author One\authormark{1},
              Author Two\authormark{2},
              Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
       \normalsize
       \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
         \authormark{1}Department one  &\authormark{2}Department two \\
          School one                   &School two
       \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
       }]

     Two column text here.

5.3 '\flushbottom'
==================

Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
page.  This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
differences in facing pages can be glaring.

   If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
occurred while \output is active'.  If you get that, one option is to
change to '\raggedbottom' (*note \raggedbottom::).  Alternatively, you
can adjust the 'textheight' to make compatible pages, or you can add
some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
'\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'.  Your last option is to, in a
final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages (*note
\enlargethispage::).

   The '\flushbottom' state is the default only if you select the
'twoside' document class option (*note Document class options::).

5.4 '\raggedbottom'
===================

Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
rubber vertical lengths will be stretched.  Thus, in a two-sided
document the facing pages may be different heights.  This command can go
at any point in the document body.  See *note \flushbottom::.

   This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
option (*note Document class options::).

5.5 Page layout parameters
==========================

'\columnsep'
'\columnseprule'
'\columnwidth'
     The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
     the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
     option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
     *Note \twocolumn::.

'\headheight'
     Height of the box that contains the running head.  The default in
     the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
     sizes.

'\headsep'
     Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
     of the main text.  The default in the 'article' and 'report'
     classes is '25pt'.  In the 'book' class the default is: if the
     document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
     it is '0.275in'.

'\footskip'
     Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
     of the page footer.  The default in the 'article' and 'report'
     classes is '30pt'.  In the 'book' class the default is: when the
     type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
     '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.

'\linewidth'
     Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
     list::).  That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
     '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
     by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
     itemize::).

'\marginparpush'
'\marginsep'
'\marginparwidth'
     The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
     horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
     the horizontal width of the notes.

     Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
     declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
     '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).

     The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
     classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
     document is set at 11pt or 10pt.

     For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
     if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
     default is '11pt'.

     For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
     two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.

     For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
     two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
     while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.

'\oddsidemargin'
'\evensidemargin'
     The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
     the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
     document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
     'oneside' is in effect.  When 'twoside' is in effect, on
     even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
     'evensidemargin'.

     LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
     between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
     the remainder.

'\paperheight'
     The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
     area.  It is normally set with a document class option, as in
     '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
     options::).

'\paperwidth'
     The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
     area.  It is normally set with a document class option, as in
     '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
     options::).

'\textheight'
     The normal vertical height of the page body.  If the document is
     set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
     'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
     '41\baselineskip'.  At a type size of 11pt the default is
     '38\baselineskip' for all document classes.  At 12pt it is
     '36\baselineskip' for all classes.

'\textwidth'
     The full horizontal width of the entire page body.  For an
     'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
     chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
     '390pt' at 12pt.  For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
     a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.

     In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
     entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
     (*note \twocolumn::).

     In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the
     entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire
     column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.

     Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note
     \parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the
     specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
     the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.

     This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
     primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines.  It should
     not be used in normal LaTeX documents.

'\topmargin'
     Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
     paper, by default) and the top of the header.  The value is
     computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
     \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
     by two.

'\topskip'
     Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
     of the first line of text.  For the standard classes, the default
     is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.

5.6 Floats
==========

Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
across pages.  They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
for instance floating to the top of a later page.

   LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
'float'.

   Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
figure.  However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that while
the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
appears in the output after it.

   The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
bottom, etc.  If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent them
all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers the
rest to the next page.  In this way, floats may end up being typeset far
from their place in the source.  In particular, a float that is big may
migrate to the end of the document.  In which event, because all floats
in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in
that class also appears at the end.

   In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
PLACEMENT argument.  The possible values are a sequence of the letters
below.  The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
'book' classes, is 'tbp'.

't'
     (Top)--at the top of a text page.

'b'
     (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page.  (However, 'b' is not
     allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
     output.  To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
     package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
     <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.

'h'
     (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
     appears.  However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
     automatically added.

     To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
     '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
     For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
     <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.

'p'
     (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
     containing no text, only floats.

'!'
     Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
     ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
     appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
     page.  The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
     above.

   Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'.  All that PLACEMENT does
is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
location.  Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
except placing the float where it occurs in the source.

   To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
insert all pending floats.  If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'.  This
will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
outstanding floats.

   LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
PLACEMENT parameter.  If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
top position on this page to moved to the next page.

   Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):

'\bottomfraction'
     The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
     at the bottom; default '.3'.

'\floatpagefraction'
     The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
     floats; default '.5'.

'\textfraction'
     Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
     much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
     different page.  The default is '.2'.

'\topfraction'
     Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
     floats; default '.7'.

   Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
'\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):

'\floatsep'
     Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
     plus2pt minus2pt'.

'\intextsep'
     Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
     default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
     documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.

'\textfloatsep'
     Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
     default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.

   Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
'\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):

'bottomnumber'
     Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
     page; default 1.

'dbltopnumber'
     Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
     two-column page; default 2.

'topnumber'
     Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
     default 2.

'totalnumber'
     Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.

   The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
problem of floats being pushed to the end.  A full explanation of the
float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article "How to
influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
LaTeX?"  (<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>).

6 Sectioning
************

Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:

'\part'
'\chapter'
     ('report' and 'book' class only)
'\section'
'\subsection'
'\subsubsection'
'\paragraph'
'\subparagraph'

   All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,

     \chapter[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}

   In addition to providing the heading TITLE in the main text, the
section title can appear in two other places:

  1. The table of contents.
  2. The running head at the top of the page.

   You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places.

   Also, all sectioning commands have '*'-forms that print TITLE as
usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table
of contents.  For instance:

     \section*{Preamble}

   The '\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are
numbered.  The '\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not
affect the numbering of parts.  The normal use of this command is
something like

     \chapter{A Chapter}
     ...
     \appendix
     \chapter{The First Appendix}

   The 'secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers.  The
setting

     \setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}

suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is
level zero.  The default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in LaTeX's 'article' class
and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.  (*Note \setcounter::.)

6.1 '\@startsection'
====================

Synopsis:

     \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}

   Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
divisions such as '\section' or '\subsection'.

   Note that the 'titlesec' package makes manipulation of sectioning
easier.  Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
satisfied with '\@startsection', some cannot.  For instance, in the
standard LaTeX 'book' and 'report' classes the commands '\chapter' and
'\report' are not constructed in this way.  To make such a command you
may want to use the '\secdef' command.

   Technically, '\@startsection' has the form
     \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
(the star '*' is optional), so that issuing
     \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}}
redefines '\section' to have the form '\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (here
too, the star '*' is optional).  *Note Sectioning::.  This implies that
when you write a command like '\renewcommand{section}{...}', the
'\@startsection{...}' must come last in the definition.  See the
examples below.

NAME
     Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header.  This
     counter must be defined separately.  Most commonly this is either
     'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'.  Although in those three
     cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
     itself, using the same name is not required.

     Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
     the page headers.  See the third example below.

LEVEL
     An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command: 0 for
     'chapter' (only applies to the standard 'book' and 'report'
     classes), 1 for 'section', 2 for 'subsection', 3 for
     'subsubsection', 4 for 'paragraph', and 5 for 'subparagraph'.  In
     the 'book' and 'report' classes 'part' has level -1, while in the
     'article' class 'part' has level 0.

     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of 'secnumdepth' then
     the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered.  For
     instance, in an 'article', if 'secnumdepth' is 1 then a
     '\section{Introduction}' command will produce output like "1
     Introduction" while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output
     like "Discussion", without the number prefix.  *Note
     Sectioning/secnumdepth::.

     If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of TOCDEPTH then the
     table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit.  For
     instance, in an 'article', if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of
     contents will list sections but not subsections.

INDENT
     A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
     respect to the left margin.  To have the title flush with the
     margin use '0pt'.  A negative indentation such as '-\parindent'
     will move the title into the left margin.

BEFORESKIP
     The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
     that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title.  This space
     will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
     top of a fresh page.  If this number is negative then the first
     paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
     non-negative then the first paragraph is indented.  (Note that the
     negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
     -3pt'.)

     For example, if BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex' then
     to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
     the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph
     in the section will not be indented.  Using a rubber length, with
     'plus' and 'minus', is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
     flexibility in making up the page (*note Lengths::).

     The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
     the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
     the header is that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the text
     font, the '\baselineskip' of the title font, and the absolute value
     of the BEFORESKIP.  This space is typically rubber so it may
     stretch or shrink.  (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page
     so that the vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the
     header text will be where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first
     text line on that page.)

AFTERSKIP
     This is a length.  If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
     vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
     If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
     that it becomes part of the next paragraph.  In this case the
     absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
     end of the title and the beginning of the following paragraph.
     (Note that the negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus
     -2pt minus -3pt'.)

     As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length, with 'plus' and 'minus'
     components, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
     flexibility in putting together the page.

     If 'afterskip' is non-negative then the full accounting of the
     vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
     and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
     that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the title font, the
     '\baselineskip' of the text font, and the value of AFTER.  That
     space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink.  (Note that
     because the sign of 'afterskip' changes the sectioning unit
     header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
     'afterskip' to cancel part of the '\parskip'.)

STYLE
     Controls the styling of the title.  See the examples below.
     Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
     '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'.  The last command in STYLE
     may be one such as '\MakeUppercase' or '\fbox' that takes one
     argument.  The section title will be supplied as the argument to
     this command.  For instance, setting STYLE to
     '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are bold and
     upper case.

   These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
'report' classes.

        'section'              'subsection'           'subsubsection'
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
*note NAME: \@startsection/name.sectionsubsection     subsubsection
*note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.12                  3
*note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.'0pt''0pt'        '0pt'
*note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.'-3.5ex plus -1ex'-3.25ex plus -1ex'-3.25ex plus -1ex
        minus -0.2ex'          minus -0.2ex'          minus -0.2ex'
*note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.'2.3ex plus 0.2ex''1.5ex plus 0.2ex''1.5ex plus 0.2ex'
*note STYLE: \@startsection/style.'\normalfont\Large\bfseries''\normalfont\large\bfseries''\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'

   Here are examples.  They go either in a package or class file or in
the preamble of a LaTeX document.  If you put them in the preamble they
must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
(Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
mode.' means that you forgot this.)  *Note \makeatletter and
\makeatother::.

   This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered.  It
says '\renewcommand' because LaTeX's standard classes have already
defined a '\section'.  For the same reason it does not define a
'section' counter, or the commands '\thesection' and '\l@section'.

     \renewcommand\section{%
       \@startsection{section}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
         {1}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
         {0pt}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
         {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
         {2.3ex plus.2ex}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
         {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
       }

   This will put 'subsection' titles in small caps type, inline with the
paragraph.

     \renewcommand\subsection{%
       \@startsection{subsection}%  *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
         {2}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
         {0em}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
         {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
         {-1em plus 0.2em}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
         {\scshape}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
       }

   The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
display that counter.

     \setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
     \newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
     \renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}%               how to display
       {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c@subsubparagraph}%  numbering
     \newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
                              {subsubparagraph}%
                              {6}%
                              {0em}%
                              {\baselineskip}%
                              {0.5\baselineskip}%
                              {\normalfont\normalsize}}
     \newcommand*\l@subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
     \newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers

7 Cross references
******************

One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to
refer the reader to them, as in "See Figure~3 for more details."

   Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if
that number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to
update this reference by hand.  Instead, LaTeX has you write a "label"
like '\label{eq:GreensThm}' and refer to it with 'See
equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'.

   LaTeX writes the information from the labels to a file with the same
name as the file containing the '\label{...}' but with an '.aux'
extension.  (The information has the format
'\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}' where CURRENTLABEL is the
current value of the macro '\@currentlabel' that is usually updated
whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.)

   The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your
document has a "forward reference", a '\ref{KEY}' that appears earlier
than the associated '\label{KEY}'; see the example in the
'\pageref{...}' description.  LaTeX gets the information for references
from the '.aux' file.  If this is the first time you are compiling the
document then you will get a message 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
changed. Rerun to get cross references right.' and in the output the
reference will appear as two question marks '??', in boldface.  Or, if
you change some things so the references change then you get the same
warning and the output contains the old reference information.  The
solution in either case is just to compile the document a second time.

7.1 '\label'
============

Synopsis:

     \label{KEY}

   Assign a reference number to KEY.  In ordinary text '\label{KEY}'
assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit.  Inside an
environment with numbering, such as a 'table' or 'theorem' environment,
'\label{KEY}' assigns to KEY the number of that environment.  Retrieve
the assigned number with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).

   A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters.  Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
as usual.

   A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
suffix separated by a colon or period.  This helps to avoid accidentally
creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more
readable.  Some commonly-used prefixes:

'ch'
     for chapters
'sec'
     for lower-level sectioning commands
'fig'
     for figures
'tab'
     for tables
'eq'
     for equations

   Thus, '\label{fig:Euler}' is a label for a figure with a portrait of
the great man.

   In this example below the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the
current section and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the
figure.  (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and
tables.)

     \section{section name}
     \label{sec:test}
     This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
     \begin{figure}
       ...
       \caption{caption text}
       \label{fig:test}
     \end{figure}
     See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.

7.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
===================

Synopsis:

     \pageref{KEY}

   Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.

   In this example the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula
number and for the page number.  (Note that the two references are
forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice to
resolve those.)

     The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
       ...
     \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
        \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
     \end{equation}

7.3 '\ref{KEY}'
===============

Synopsis:

     \ref{KEY}

   Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::).  It
does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
the bare number itself.

   In this example, the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'.  Note that it is a
forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}'.

     The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
     \begin{enumerate}
     \item Plain \TeX
     \item \label{popular} \LaTeX
     \item Con\TeX t
     \end{enumerate}

8 Environments
**************

LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.  An
environment begins with '\begin' and ends with '\end', like this:

     \begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
       ...
     \end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}

   The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
end.  For instance, the input '\begin{table*}...\end{table}' will cause
an error like: '! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
\end{table}.'

   Environments are executed within a group.

8.1 'abstract'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{abstract}
     ...
     \end{abstract}

   Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.  This
environment is only defined in the 'article' and 'report' document
classes (*note Document classes::).

   Using the example below in the 'article' class produces a displayed
paragraph.  Document class option 'titlepage' causes the abstract to be
on a separate page (*note Document class options::); this is the default
only in the 'report' class.

     \begin{abstract}
       We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
       to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
       in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
     \end{abstract}

   The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column
document (for a more flexible solution, use the package 'abstract').

     \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
       ...
     \begin{document}
     \title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
     \author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
     \twocolumn[
       \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
          \maketitle
          \begin{abstract}
            Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
            team.
          \end{abstract}
        \end{@twocolumnfalse}
        ]
     {   % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
      \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
      \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
     }

8.2 'array'
===========

Synopsis:

     \begin{array}{COLS}
       COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
       ...
     \end{array}

   or

     \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
       COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
       ...
     \end{array}

   Produce a mathematical array.  This environment can only be used in
math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::).  Column entries are
separated by an ampersand ('&').  Rows are terminated with
double-backslashes (*note \\::).

   The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions.  See *note
tabular:: for the complete description of COLS, and of the other common
features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.

   There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'.  The first
is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (except
if the COLS definition specifies the column with 'p{...}', which causes
the entry to be typeset in text mode).  The second is that, instead of
'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space in an
'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which gives half the width
between columns.  The default for this is '5pt'.

   To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
package.  It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
by parentheses '(...)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
brackets '[...]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
braces '{...}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.

   Here is an example of an array:

     \begin{equation}
       \begin{array}{cr}
         \sqrt{y}  &12.3 \\
         x^2       &3.4
       \end{array}
     \end{equation}

   The next example works if '\usepackage{amsmath}' is in the preamble:

     \begin{equation}
       \begin{vmatrix}{cc}
         a  &b \\
         c  &d
       \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
     \end{equation}

8.3 'center'
============

Synopsis:

     \begin{center}
       ... text ...
     \end{center}

   Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
centered within the left and right margins on the current page.  Use
double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (*note \\::).
If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will
insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or
shrinking any interword space.

   This environment inserts space above and below the text body.  See
*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
environment.

   This example produces three centered lines.  There is extra vertical
space between the last two lines.

     \begin{center}
       A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
       of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
       the School of Environmental Engineering
     \end{center}

   In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
a line break for the part before the double backslash.  If so, it will
center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
ending.

     \begin{center}
       My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
       alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
       I grew up in that belief.  --Richard Burton
     \end{center}

   A double backslash after the final line is optional.

8.3.1 '\centering'
------------------

A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered.  It is
most often used inside an environment such as 'figure', or in a
'parbox'.

   Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
add vertical space above and below the text.

   It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
formats paragraph units.  If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
'table' that ends the paragraph unit.  Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
'zz' that is formatted as usual.  See also the following example.

   This example's '\centering' causes the graphic to be horizontally
centered.

     \begin{figure}
       \centering
       \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
       \caption{CTAN Lion}  \label{fig:CTANLion}
     \end{figure}

   The scope of the '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.

8.4 'description'
=================

Synopsis:

     \begin{description}
     \item[LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
     \item[LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
       ...
     \end{description}

   Environment to make a labeled list of items.  Each item's LABEL is
typeset in bold, and is flush left so that long labels continue into the
first line of the item text.  There must be at least one item; having
none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
\item'.

   This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
definitions.  The labels 'lama' and 'llama' come out in boldface with
their left edges aligned on the left margin.

     \begin{definition}
       \item[lama] A priest.
       \item[llama] A beast.
     \end{definition}

   Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::).  Use the
optional labels, as in '\item[Main point]', because there is no sensible
default.  Following the '\item' is optional text, which may contain
multiple paragraphs.

   Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
will come out bold.  For instance, if the label text calls for
typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
typewriter, if that is available.  The simplest way to get non-bold
typewriter is to use declarative style: '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
Similarly, get the standard roman font with '\item[{\rm label text}]'.

   For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
and *note enumerate::.  Unlike those environments, nesting 'description'
environments does not change the default label; it is boldface and flush
left at all levels.

   For information about list layout parameters, including the default
values, and for information about customizing list layout, see *note
list::.  The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.

   This example changes the description labels to small caps.

     \renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{%
       {\hspace{\labelsep}\textsc{#1}}}

8.5 'displaymath'
=================

Synopsis:

     \begin{displaymath}
     MATH TEXT
     \end{displaymath}

   Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
style and centered.  To make the text be flush-left use the global
option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.

   In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
math text.  One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
environment (*note equation::).

   LaTeX will not break the MATH TEXT across lines.

   Note that the 'amsmath' package has significantly more extensive
displayed equation facilities.  For example, there are a number of ways
in that package for having math text broken across lines.

   The construct '\[MATH TEXT\]' is essentially a synonym for
'\begin{displaymath}MATH TEXT\end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier
to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a square
bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely
be unique.  (The construct '$$MATH TEXT$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'.  It is not a synonym,
because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't started in
math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
'fleqn' option.)

   The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
     \begin{displaymath}
       \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
     \end{displaymath}
   Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\(
\int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.

8.6 'document'
==============

The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document.  It
is required in every LaTeX document.  *Note Starting and ending::.

8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
------------------------

Synopsis:

     \AtBeginDocument{CODE}

   Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
very end of the preamble.  The code is executed after the font selection
tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
current font.  However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
you cannot do any typesetting with it.

   You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
will be executed in the order that you gave them.

8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
----------------------

Synopsis:

     \AtEndDocument{CODE}

   Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document.  Specifically,
it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.

   You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
will be executed in the order that you gave them.

8.7 'enumerate'
===============

Synopsis:

     \begin{enumerate}
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
     ...
     \end{enumerate}

   Environment to produce a numbered list of items.  The format of the
label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
below.  The default top-level numbering is '1.', '2.', etc.  Each
'enumerate' list environment must have at least one item; having none
causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.

   This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
marathon.  As a top-level list the labels would come out as '1.' and
'2.'.

     \begin{enumerate}
      \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
      \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
     \end{enumerate}

   Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::).  If you
give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
as in '\item[Interstitial label]', then the next item will continue the
interrupted sequence (*note \item::).  That is, you will get labels like
'1.', then 'Interstitial label', then '2.'.  Following the '\item' is
optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.

   Enumerations may be nested within other 'enumerate' environments, or
within any paragraph-making environment such as 'itemize' (*note
itemize::), up to four levels deep.  This gives LaTeX's default for the
format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost
level.

  1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
  2. lower case letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
  3. lower case roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
  4. upper case letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...

   The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
'\enumiv' (*note Counters::).

   For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
description:: and *note itemize::.  For information about list layout
parameters, including the default values, and for information about
customizing list layout, see *note list::.  The package 'enumitem' is
useful for customizing lists.

   To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
'\labelenumiv'.  For instance, this first level list will be labelled
with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.

     \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
     \begin{enumerate}
       \item Shows as boldface A
       \item Shows as boldface B
     \end{enumerate}

   For a list of counter-labeling commands see *note \alph \Alph \arabic
\roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.

8.8 'eqnarray'
==============

First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment is depreciated.  It has
infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article "Avoid
eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>).  New documents should
include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment.

   Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with
old documents, a synopsis:

     \begin{eqnarray}
       FIRST FORMULA LEFT  &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE  &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
       ...
     \end{eqnarray}

   or

     \begin{eqnarray*}
       FIRST FORMULA LEFT  &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE  &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
       ...
     \end{eqnarray*}

   Display a sequence of equations or inequalities.  The left and right
sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
mode.

   It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
double backslash  '\\').  The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
(*note \\::).

   The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
command.  The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
otherwise being the same.

   The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
lines.  It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.

   This example shows three lines.  The first two lines make an
inequality, while the third line has not entry on the left side.

     \begin{eqnarray*}
       \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n}     \\
         &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n      \\
         &=    &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
     \end{eqnarray*}

8.9 'equation'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{equation}
       math text
     \end{equation}

   Make a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) with an
equation number in the right margin.

   The equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.

   You should have no blank lines between '\begin{equation}' and
'\begin{equation}', or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
dollar sign, $'$'.

   Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
facilities.  Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
new documents.

8.10 'figure'
=============

Synopsis:

     \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
       figure body
     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
     \label{LABEL}
     \end{figure}

   or

     \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
       figure body
     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
     \label{LABEL}
     \end{figure*}

   A class of floats (*note Floats::).  Because they cannot be split
across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
following page.

   For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.

   The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::).  It produces a figure that
spans both columns, at the top of the page.  To add the possibility of
placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
Floats::.

   The figure body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
it can contain text, commands, etc.

   The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::).  The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
for the figure.  By default it is numbered.  If LOFTITLE is present, it
is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
contents::).

   This example makes a figure out of a graphic.  It requires one of the
packages 'graphics' or 'graphicx'.  The graphic, with its caption, will
be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the end of the
document, on a page of floats.

     \begin{figure}[t]
       \centering
       \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
       \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
     \end{figure}

8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
===========================================

Synopsis:

     \begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
       TEXT
     \end{filecontents}

   or

     \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
       TEXT
     \end{filecontents*}

   Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT.  The unstarred
version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
created file with a header; see the example below.  The starred version
'filecontents*' does not include the header.

   This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
often appears before the '\documentclass' command.  It is typically used
when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file.  The
environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
and thus make the source file self-contained.  Another use is to include
'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.

   The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
if so, does not do anything.  There is a 'filecontents' package that
redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.

   For example, this document

     \documentclass{article}
     \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
     \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
     \end{filecontents}
     \usepackage{JH}
     \begin{document}
     Article by \myname.
     \end{document}

   produces this file 'JH.sty'.

     %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
     %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
     %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
     %%
     \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}

8.12 'flushleft'
================

     \begin{flushleft}
     LINE1 \\
     LINE2 \\
     ...
     \end{flushleft}

   The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
right.  Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.

8.12.1 '\raggedright'
---------------------

The '\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the 'flushleft'
environment.  This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
'quote' or in a 'parbox'.

   Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
units.  To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
paragraph unit.

8.13 'flushright'
=================

     \begin{flushright}
     LINE1 \\
     LINE2 \\
     ...
     \end{flushright}

   The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
left.  Each line must be terminated with the control sequence '\\'.

8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
--------------------

The '\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the 'flushright'
environment.  This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
'quote' or in a 'parbox'.

   Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
units.  To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
paragraph unit.

8.14 'itemize'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{itemize}
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
     ...
     \end{itemize}

   The 'itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
The format of the label numbering depends on the nesting level of this
environment; see below.  Each 'itemize' list environment must have at
least one item; having none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's
wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.

   This example gives a two-item list.  As a top-level list each label
would come out as a bullet, *.

     \begin{itemize}
      \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
      \item Rice portrait
     \end{itemize}

   Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::).  If you
give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
as in '\item[Optional label]', then by default it will appear in bold
and be flush right, so it could extend into the left margin.  For labels
that are flush left see the *note description:: environment.  Following
the '\item' is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.

   Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
deep.  They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).  The 'itemize'
environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through '\labelitemiv' to
produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lower case
roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
level).  These are the default marks at each level.

  1. * (bullet, from '\textbullet')
  2. -- (bold en-dash, from '\normalfont\bfseries\textendash')
  3. * (asterisk, from '\textasteriskcentered')
  4. .  (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
     '\textperiodcentered')

   Change the labels with '\renewcommand'.  For instance, this makes the
first level use diamonds.

     \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}

   The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'.  (Note the convention of using
lower case roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
nesting level.)  The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em' in
two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and '1.7em'
in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.

   For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
description:: and *note enumerate::.  For information about list layout
parameters, including the default values, and for information about
customizing list layout, see *note list::.  The package 'enumitem' is
useful for customizing lists.

   This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
lists.

     \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em

   Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
space between items.  Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
\parskip::):

     \newenvironment{itemize*}%
       {\begin{itemize}%
         \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
         \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
         \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
       {\end{itemize}}

8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
==========================================

This environment is used for creating letters.  *Note Letters::.

8.16 'list'
===========

Synopsis:

     \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] text of first item
     \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] text of second item
     ...
     \end{list}

   The 'list' environment is a generic environment for constructing more
specialized lists.  It is most often used to create lists via the
'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments (*note
description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).

   Also, many standard LaTeX environments that are not visually lists
are constructed using 'list', including 'quotation', 'quote', 'center',
'verbatim', and plenty more (*note quotation and quote::, *note
center::, *note flushright::).

   The third-party package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
Here, we describe the 'list' environment by defining a new custom
environment.

     \newcounter{namedlistcounter}  % number the items
     \newenvironment{named}
       {\begin{list}
          {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling argument
          {\usecounter{namedlistcounter}   % spacing argument
           \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % still spacing arg
       }
       {\end{list}}

     \begin{named}
       \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
       \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
       \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
     \end{named}

   The 'list' environment's mandatory first argument, LABELING,
specifies the default labeling of list items.  It can contain text and
LaTeX commands, as above where it contains both 'Item' and
'\Roman{...}'.  LaTeX forms the label by putting the LABELING argument
in a box of width '\labelwidth'.  If the label is wider than that, the
additional material extends to the right.  When making an instance of a
list you can override the default labeling by giving '\item' an optional
argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above
'\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.

   The label box is constructed by the command '\makelabel'.  By default
it positions the contents flush right.  It takes one argument, the
label.  It typesets the contents in LR mode.  An example of changing its
definition is that to the above example before the definition of the
'named' environment add '\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}',
and between the '\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the
SPACING argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'.  Then the
items will be typeset in small caps.  Similarly, changing the second
code line to '\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box.
Another example is at the bottom of this entry.

   The mandatory second argument SPACING can have a list of commands to
redefine the spacing parameters for the list, such as
'\setlength{\labelwidth}{2em}'.  If this argument is empty, i.e., '{}',
then the list will have the default spacing given below.  To number the
items using a counter, put '\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' in this argument
(*note \usecounter::).

   Below are the spacing parameters for list formatting.  See also the
figure below.  Each is a length (*note Lengths::).  The vertical spaces
are normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give
TeX flexibility in setting the page.  Change each with a command such as
'\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}'.  For some effects these
lengths should be zero or negative.  Default values for derived
environments such as 'itemize' can be changed from the values shown here
for the basic 'list'.

'\itemindent'
     Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond 'leftmargin', of the
     first line each item.  Its default value is '0pt'.

'\itemsep'
     Vertical space between items, beyond the '\parsep'.  The defaults
     for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and
     'report' classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt',
     '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that
     is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt').  The defaults at 11 point are: '4.5pt
     plus2pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and
     'topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt').  The defaults at 12
     point are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2.5pt
     plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that is, '2.5pt plus1pt
     minus1pt').

'\labelsep'
     Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.  The
     default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes is
     '0.5em'.

'\labelwidth'
     Horizontal width.  The box containing the label is nominally this
     wide.  If '\makelabel' returns text that is wider than this then
     the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this
     extra material.  If '\makelabel' returns text of width less than or
     equal to '\labelwidth' then LaTeX's default is that the label is
     typeset flush right in a box of this width.

     The left edge of the label box is
     '\leftmargin'+'\itemindent'-'\labelsep'-'\labelwidth' from the left
     margin of the enclosing environment.

     The default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at
     the top level is '\leftmargini'-'\labelsep', (which is '2em' in one
     column mode and '1.5em' in two column mode).  At the second level
     it is '\leftmarginii'-'\labelsep', and at the third level it is
     '\leftmarginiii'-'\labelsep'.  These definitions make the label's
     left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
     environment.

'\leftmargin'
     Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing
     environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level
     list), and the left margin of this list.  It must be non-negative.

     In the standard LaTeX document classes, a top-level list has this
     set to the value of '\leftmargini', while a list that is nested
     inside a top-level list has this margin set to '\leftmarginii'.
     More deeply nested lists get the values of '\leftmarginiii' through
     '\leftmarginvi'.  (Nesting greater than level five generates the
     error message 'Too deeply nested'.)

     The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
     'book', and 'report' classes are: '\leftmargini' is '2.5em' (in two
     column mode, '2em'), '\leftmarginii' is '2.2em', and
     '\leftmarginiii' is '1.87em'.

'\listparindent'
     Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
     '\leftmargin', for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
     item.  A negative value makes this an "outdent".  Its default value
     is '0pt'.

'\parsep'
     Vertical space between paragraphs within an item.  In the 'book'
     and 'article' classes The defaults for the first three levels in
     LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size
     are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
     The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt
     plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.  The defaults at 12 point size are:
     '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.

'\partopsep'
     Vertical space added, beyond '\topsep'+'\parskip', to the top and
     bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded
     by a blank line.  (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
     changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the
     line following the list is blank does not matter.)

     The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
     'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '2pt plus1
     minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'.  The
     defaults at 11 point are: '3pt plus1pt minus1pt', '3pt plus1pt
     minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt').  The defaults at 12 point
     are: '3pt plus2pt minus3pt', '3pt plus2pt minus2pt', and '1pt
     plus0pt minus1pt'.

'\rightmargin'
     Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
     margin of the enclosing environment.  Its default value is '0pt'.
     It must be non-negative.

'\topsep'
     Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
     addition to '\parskip' (*note \parskip::).  The defaults for the
     first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report'
     classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt', '4pt plus2pt
     minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults at 11 point
     are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt
     plus1pt minus1pt'.  The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt plus4pt
     minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt'.

   This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.

.......................................................................
..............Surrounding environment, preceding material.............. -
                                                                        | v0 
 |---h0--|-h1-|                                                         |
 ..Label..    .....First item.....................................      -
      ............................................................
      ............................................................      -
                                                                        | v1
           ........First item, second paragraph ..................      -
      |-h2-|                                                            | v2
                                                                        |
 ..Label..    .....Second item....................................      -
      ............................................................
      ............................................................      -
|-h3--|-h4-|                                                     |-h5-| |v3
                                                                        |
..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
.......................................................................
   The lengths shown are listed below.  The key relationship is that the
right edge of the bracket for H1 equals the right edge of the bracket
for H4, so that the left edge of the label box is at H3+H4-(H0+H1).

V0
     '\topsep' + '\parskip' if the list environment does not start a new
     paragraph, and '\topsep'+'\parskip'+'\partopsep' if it does

V1
     '\parsep'

V2
     '\itemsep'+'\parsep'

V3
     Same as V0.  (This space is affected by whether a blank line
     appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
     appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)

H1
     '\labelsep'

H2
     '\listparindent'

H3
     '\leftmargin'

H4
     '\itemindent'

H5
     '\rightmargin'

   The list's left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or with
respect to the page margins for a top-level list.  The line width used
for typesetting the list items is '\linewidth' (*note Page layout
parameters::).  For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
enclosing environment with '\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}'.

   Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
parameters below.  For each, the LaTeX default is '-\@lowpenalty', that
is, '-51'.  Because it is negative, it somewhat encourages a page break
at each spot.  Change it with, e.g., '\@beginparpenalty=9999'; a value
of 10000 prohibits a page break.

'\@beginparpenalty'
     The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default
     '-51').

'\@itempenalty'
     The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default
     '-51').

'\@endparpenalty'
     The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default
     '-51').

   This example has the labels in red.  They are numbered, and the left
edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.

     \usepackage{color}
     \newcounter{cnt}
     \newcommand{\makeredlabel}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1.}}
     \newenvironment{redlabel}
       {\begin{list}
         {\arabic{cnt}}
         {\usecounter{cnt}
          \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
          \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
          \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5em}
          \setlength{\itemindent}{0.5em} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
          \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
         }
       }
     {\end{list} }

8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
----------------------------------

Synopsis:

     \item text of item

   or
     \item[OPTIONAL-LABEL] text of item

   An entry in a list.  The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
default depends on the list type.

   Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets '[...]',
if you have an item whose text starts with '[', you have to to hide the
bracket inside curly braces, as in: '\item {[} is an open square
bracket'; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
label.

   Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
way: '\item[Close square bracket, {]}]'.  *Note LaTeX command syntax::.

   In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
label and one that uses the optional label.

     \begin{enumerate}
       \item Moe
       \item[sometimes] Shemp
       \item Larry
     \end{enumerate}

   The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.'.  Because of the
optional label in the second item, the third item is not labelled '3.'.

8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
----------------------------------------------

Synopsis:

     \begin{trivlist}
       ...
     \end{trivlist}

   A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
not indented and an '\item' without an optional argument produces no
text.  It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
the '\item' command as part of the environment's definition.  For
instance, the 'center' environment is defined essentially like this:

     \newenvironment{center}
       {\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
       {\end{trivlist}}

   Using 'trivlist' in this way allows the macro to inherit some common
code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments; detecting
whether the text following the environment should be considered a new
paragraph or a continuation of the previous one; adjusting the left and
right margins for possible nested list environments.

   Specifically, 'trivlist' uses the current values of the list
parameters (*note list::), except that '\parsep' is set to the value of
'\parskip', and '\leftmargin', '\labelwidth', and '\itemindent' are set
to zero.

   This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.

     \begin{trivlist}
     \item The \textit{Surprise} is not old; no one would call her old.
     \item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
     \end{trivlist}

8.17 'math'
===========

Synopsis:

     \begin{math}
     MATH
     \end{math}

   The 'math' environment inserts given MATH material within the running
text.  '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms.  *Note Math formulas::.

8.18 'minipage'
===============

     \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}
     TEXT
     \end{minipage}

   The 'minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that
will not be broken across pages.  This is similar to the '\parbox'
command (*note \parbox::), but unlike '\parbox', other paragraph-making
environments can be used inside a minipage.

   The arguments are the same as for '\parbox' (*note \parbox::).

   By default, paragraphs are not indented in the 'minipage'
environment.  You can restore indentation with a command such as
'\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command.

   Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables.  A
'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
Counters::).

   However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.

8.19 'picture'
==============

     \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
     ... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
     \end{picture}

   The 'picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of
picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles.  You tell
LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
coordinates.  A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
a minus sign--a number like '5', '0.3' or '-3.1416'.  A coordinate
specifies a length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if
'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
a length of 2.54 centimeters.

   You should only change the value of '\unitlength', using the
'\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment.  The default
value is '1pt'.

   The 'picture' package redefine the 'picture' environment so that
everywhere a number is used in a PICTURE COMMANDS to specify a
coordinate, one can use alternatively a length.  Be aware however that
this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing '\unitlength'.

   A "position" is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'.  Coordinates
are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
normally at the lower-left corner of the picture.  Note that when a
position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
parentheses serve to delimit the argument.

   The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument which is a
position (WIDTH,HEIGHT), which specifies the size of the picture.  The
environment produces a rectangular box with these WIDTH and HEIGHT.

   The 'picture' environment also has an optional position argument
(XOFFSET,YOFFSET), following the size argument, that can change the
origin.  (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
contained in square brackets.)  The optional argument gives the
coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
(thereby determining the origin).  For example, if '\unitlength' has
been set to '1mm', the command

     \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)

produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters,
whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose upper-right
corner is therefore the point (110,220).  When you first draw a picture,
you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the origin at the
lower-left corner.  If you then want to modify your picture by shifting
everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument.

   The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
the picture.  This need bear no relation to how large the picture really
is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or
even off the page.  The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in
determining how much room to leave for it.

   Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the '\put' command.
The command

     \put (11.3,-.3){...}

puts the object specified by '...' in the picture, with its reference
point at coordinates (11.3,-.3).  The reference points for various
objects will be described below.

   The '\put' command creates an "LR box".  You can put anything that
can go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the '\put'
command.  When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left
corner of the box.

   The 'picture' commands are described in the following sections.

8.19.1 '\circle'
----------------

Synopsis:

     \circle[*]{DIAMETER}

   The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
the specified one as possible.  The '*'-form of the command draws a
solid circle.

   Circles up to 40pt can be drawn.

8.19.2 '\makebox'
-----------------

Synopsis:

     \makebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}

   The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a WIDTH and
HEIGHT in multiples of '\unitlength'.

   The optional argument, '[POSITION]', specifies the quadrant that your
TEXT appears in.  You may select up to two of the following:

't'
     Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.

'b'
     Moves the item to the bottom.

'l'
     Moves the item to the left.

'r'
     Moves the item to the right.

   *Note \makebox::.

8.19.3 '\framebox'
------------------

Synopsis:

     \framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...}

   The '\framebox' command is like '\makebox' (see previous section),
except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
creates.

   The '\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness '\fboxrule', and
leaves a space '\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.

8.19.4 '\dashbox'
-----------------

Draws a box with a dashed line.  Synopsis:

     \dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT}

   '\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a 'picture'
environment.  Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall
width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT.  The TEXT is positioned at optional
POS.

   A dashed box looks best when the RWIDTH and RHEIGHT are multiples of
the DLEN.

8.19.5 '\frame'
---------------

Synopsis:

     \frame{TEXT}

   The '\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT.  The
reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame.  No extra space
is put between the frame and the object.

8.19.6 '\line'
--------------

Synopsis:

     \line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}

   The '\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope
XSLOPE/YSLOPE.

   Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y
have integer values from -6 through 6.  For lines of any slope, and
plenty of other shapes, see 'pict2e' and many other packages on CTAN.

8.19.7 '\linethickness'
-----------------------

The '\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a
positive length.

   '\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
circles, or the quarter circles drawn by '\oval'.

8.19.8 '\thicklines'
--------------------

The '\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
and *note \thinlines::.

8.19.9 '\thinlines'
-------------------

The '\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
and *note \thicklines::.

8.19.10 '\multiput'
-------------------

Synopsis:

     \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}

   The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
across a picture.  OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at
(x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times.

8.19.11 '\oval'
---------------

Synopsis:

     \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]

   The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.  The
optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only half of the oval
via the following:

't'
     selects the top half;
'b'
     selects the bottom half;
'r'
     selects the right half;
'l'
     selects the left half.

   It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by
setting PORTION to 'tr', 'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.

   The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
rounded corners.

8.19.12 '\put'
--------------

Synopsis:

     \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){ ... }

   The '\put' command places the material specified by the (mandatory)
argument in braces at the given coordinate, (XCOORD,YCOORD).

8.19.13 '\shortstack'
---------------------

Synopsis:

     \shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...}

   The '\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects.  The valid
positions are:

'r'
     Move the objects to the right of the stack.
'l'
     Move the objects to the left of the stack
'c'
     Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)

   Objects are separated with '\\'.

8.19.14 '\vector'
-----------------

Synopsis:

     \vector(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}

   The '\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
length and slope.  The XSLOPE and YSLOPE values must lie between -4 and
+4, inclusive.

8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
============================

Synopsis:

     \begin{quotation}
     TEXT
     \end{quotation}

   or

     \begin{quote}
     TEXT
     \end{quote}

   Include a quotation.

   In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
'\leftmargin' and the text is justified at both.  As with the main text,
leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.

   To compare the two: in the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are
indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small, '0pt plus
1pt'.  In the 'quote' environment, paragraphs are not indented and there
is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the rubber length
'\parsep').  Thus, the 'quotation' environment may be more suitable for
documents where new paragraphs are marked by an indent rather than by a
vertical separation.  In addition, 'quote' may be more suitable for a
short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.

     \begin{quotation}
     \it Four score and seven years ago
       ... shall not perish from the earth.
     \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
     \end{quotation}

8.21 'tabbing'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{tabbing}
     ROW1COL1 \= ROW1COL2 ...  \\
     ROW2COL1 \> ROW2COL2 ...  \\
     ...
     \end{tabbing}

   The 'tabbing' environment aligns text in columns.  It works by
setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on a typewriter.
It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
and known in advance.

   This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):

     \begin{tabbing}
     \hspace{0.75in}     \= \hspace{0.40in}  \= \hspace{0.40in}    \kill
     Ship                \> Guns             \> Year    \\
     \textit{Sophie}     \> 14               \> 1800    \\
     \textit{Polychrest} \> 24               \> 1803    \\
     \textit{Lively}     \> 38               \> 1804    \\
     \textit{Surprise}   \> 28               \> 1805    \\
     \end{tabbing}

   Both the 'tabbing' environment and the more widely-used 'tabular'
environment put text in columns.  The most important distinction is that
in 'tabular' the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
while in 'tabbing' the user sets the tab stops.  Another distinction is
that 'tabular' generates a box, but 'tabbing' can be broken across
pages.  Finally, while 'tabular' can be used in any mode, 'tabbing' can
be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.

   A 'tabbing' environment always starts a new paragraph, without
indentation.  Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
to use the starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a
tabbed row.  The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of
line, so that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.

   The 'tabbing' environment contains a sequence of "tabbed rows".  The
first tabbed row begins immediately after '\begin{tabbing}' and each row
ends with '\\' or '\kill'.  The last row may omit the '\\' and end with
just '\end{tabbing}'.

   At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a current tab stop
pattern, a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc.  These
create N corresponding columns.  Tab stop 0 is always the left margin,
defined by the enclosing environment.  Tab stop number I is set if it is
assigned a horizontal position on the page.  Tab stop number I can only
be set if all the stops 0, ..., i-1 have already been set; normally
later stops are to the right of earlier ones.

   By default any text typeset in a 'tabbing' environment is typeset
ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop.  Typesetting is
done in LR mode (*note Modes::).

   The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' environment.
They are all fragile (*note \protect::).

'\\ (tabbing)'
     End a tabbed line and typeset it.

'\= (tabbing)'
     Sets a tab stop at the current position.

'\> (tabbing)'
     Advances to the next tab stop.

'\<'
     Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
     changing the margin).  Can only be used at the start of the line.

'\+'
     Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
     one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.

'\-'
     Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
     one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.

'\' (tabbing)'
     Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
     i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
     '\kill' command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
     flush against the current column's tab stop.

'\` (tabbing)'
     Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
     tab stop 0.  However, it can't move text to the right of the last
     column because there's no tab stop there.  The '\`' command moves
     all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}'
     command that ends the line, to the right margin of the 'tabbing'
     environment.  There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the
     '\`' and the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}' command that ends the line.

'\a (tabbing)'
     In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not
     produce accents as usual (*note Accents::).  Instead, use the
     commands '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`'.

'\kill'
     Sets tab stops without producing text.  Works just like '\\' except
     that it throws away the current line instead of producing output
     for it.  Any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line remain in
     effect.

'\poptabs'
     Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'.

'\pushtabs'
     Saves all current tab stop positions.  Useful for temporarily
     changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing'
     environment.

'\tabbingsep'
     Distance of the text moved by '\'' to left of current tab stop.

   This example typesets a Pascal function:

     \begin{tabbing}
     function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
              \> begin \= \+ \\
                    \> if \= n > 1 then \+ \\
                             fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
                       else \+ \\
                             fact := 1; \-\- \\
                 end;\\
     \end{tabbing}

   The output looks like this:
     function fact(n : integer) : integer;
              begin
                    if n > 1 then
                       fact := n * fact(n-1);
                    else
                       fact := 1;
              end;

   (The above example is just for illustration of the environment.  To
actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim
environment (*note verbatim::) would normally suffice.  For
pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including
'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb', 'listings', and 'minted'.)

8.22 'table'
============

Synopsis:

     \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
       table body
     \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
     \label{LABEL}
     \end{table}

   A class of floats (*note Floats::).  Because they cannot be split
across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
following page.

   For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.

   The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
it can contain text, commands, etc.

   The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::).  The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
for the table.  By default it is numbered.  If LOTTITLE is present, it
is used in the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
contents::).

   In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.

     \begin{table}[b]
       \centering
       \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
         One &The loneliest number \\
         Two &Can be as sad as one.
              It's the loneliest number since the number one.
       \end{tabular}
       \caption{Cardinal virtues}
       \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
     \end{table}

8.23 'tabular'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
     column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
       ...
     \end{tabular}

or

     \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
     column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
       ...
     \end{tabular*}

   These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
horizontal rows.  Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
in columns.  This illustrates many of the features.

     \begin{tabular}{l|l}
       \textit{Player name}  &\textit{Career home runs}  \\
       \hline
       Hank Aaron  &755 \\
       Babe Ruth   &714
     \end{tabular}

   The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
between them, is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'.  Columns are
separated with an ampersand '&'.  A horizontal rule between two rows is
created with '\hline'.  The end of each row is marked with a double
backslash '\\'.  This '\\' is optional after the last row unless an
'\hline' command follows, to put a rule below the table.

   The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:

WIDTH
     Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'.  Specifies the
     width of the 'tabular*' environment.  The space between columns
     should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
     table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
     are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
     ...' warning.

POS
     Optional.  Specifies the table's vertical position.  The default is
     to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
     the surrounding text.  There are two other possible alignments: 't'
     aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
     surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.

     This only has an effect if there is other text.  In the common case
     of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
     difference.

COLS
     Required.  Specifies the formatting of columns.  It consists of a
     sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
     column and intercolumn material.

     'l'
          A column of left-aligned items.

     'r'
          A column of right-aligned items.

     'c'
          A column of centered items.

     '|'
          A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.

     '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
          This inserts TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row.  The
          TEXT OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode.  This text is
          fragile (*note \protect::).

          This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, LaTeX's
          'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
          side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
          default is '6pt'.  That is, by default adjacent columns are
          separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly-named since
          it is not the separation between tabular columns).  By
          implication, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
          and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
          there.

          If you override the default and use an @-expression then you
          must insert any desired space yourself, as in
          '@{\hspace{1em}}'.

          An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space, including
          the space at the start or end, as in the example below where
          the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.

               \begin{flushleft}
                 \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
                   ...
                 \end{tabular}
               \end{flushleft}

          This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns,
          arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on that
          decimal point.

               \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
                 $3$ &$14$  \\
                 $9$ &$80665$
               \end{tabular}

          An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
          extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
          subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
          '\extracolsep' command.  Unlike ordinary intercolumn space,
          this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression.  An
          '\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in
          the 'cols' argument.  Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
          intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.

               \begin{center}
                 \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
                   Seven times down, eight times up
                   &such is life!
                 \end{tabular*}
               \end{center}

          To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
          given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
          specifier.

     'p{WD}'
          Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD.

          Note that a line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in
          the item, except inside an environment like 'minipage',
          'array', or 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in
          the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft'
          declaration (when used in a 'p'-column element these
          declarations must appear inside braces, as with '{\centering
          .. \\ ..}').  Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double
          backslash as ending the row.

     '*{NUM}{COLS}'
          Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
          integer and COLS is a list of specifiers.  Thus
          '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to
          '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'.  Note that COLS may contain
          another '*'-expression.

   Parameters that control formatting:

'\arrayrulewidth'
     A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
     '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
     The default is '.4pt'.  Change it as in
     '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.

'\arraystretch'
     A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
     'array' environments is multiplied.  The default is '1', for no
     scaling.  Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.

'\doublerulesep'
     A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
     by the '||' specifier.  The default is '2pt'.

'\tabcolsep'
     A length that is half of the space between columns.  The default is
     '6pt'.  Change it with '\setlength'.

   The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
lines:

8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
---------------------

Synopsis:

     \multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}

   Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns.  The
first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span.  The second
argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right.  The third
argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.

   In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
spanned by the single heading 'Name'.

     \begin{tabular}{lccl}
       \textit{ID}       &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
       978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick                  &55           \\        % row two
         ...
     \end{tabular}

   What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'.  So from
'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
and 'p{1.5in}|'.

   The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry.  To affect
that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
placement of vertical rules, and '@{...}' expressions.  Thus if COLS is
'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it.  This table
details the exact behavior.

     \begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
       \multicolumn{1}{r}{w}       % entry one
         &\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x}  % entry two
         &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y}   % entry three
         &z                        % entry four
     \end{tabular}

   Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule
because the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial
vertical bar.  Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical
rule; although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the
second COLS does have a starting one.  Between entry two and entry three
there is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
rule.  Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
leaves it out, and that takes precedence.  Finally, following entry four
there is a vertical rule because of the default.

   The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1.  Besides giving the
ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
specification, including the placement of vertical rules.

   In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'.  Also in the first
row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
center those two columns on the page range en-dash.

     \begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
       \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
         &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
       Baroque          &1600           &1760         \\
       Classical        &1730           &1820         \\
       Romantic         &1780           &1910         \\
       Impressionistic  &1875           &1925
     \end{tabular}

   Note that although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a
vertical rule between the first and second columns, because there is no
vertical bar in the COLS of either of the first row's '\multicolumn'
commands, no rule appears in the first row.

8.23.2 '\vline'
---------------

Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
full height and depth of an entry's row.  Can also be used in an
@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
as needed with '\multicolumn'.

   This example illustrates some pitfalls.  In the first line's second
entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the cell.  But
that is different than putting it halfway between the two columns, so in
that row between the first and second columns there are two vertical
rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
produced by the '\vline\hfill'.  In contrast, the first line's third
entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns.  In
the second line, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.

     \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
       x   &\vline\hfill y   &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\
       abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi
     \end{tabular}

8.23.3 '\cline'
---------------

Synopsis:

     \cline{I-J}

   Draw a horizontal rule in an 'array' or 'tabular' environment
beginning in column I and ending in column J.  The dash '-' must appear
in the mandatory argument.  To span a single column use the number
twice.

   This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
third and fourth columns.  The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
height.

     \begin{tabular}{llrr}
       a &b &c &d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
       e &f &g &h
     \end{tabular}

8.23.4 '\hline'
---------------

Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
environment.  It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
and between the rows of a table.

   In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
above the other, that span both columns.  The bottom of the table has a
single rule spanning both columns.  Because of the '\hline', the
'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.

     \begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
       Baseball   &Red Sox  \\
       Basketball &Celtics  \\ \hline
     \end{tabular}

8.24 'thebibliography'
======================

Synopsis:

     \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL}
     \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
     ...
     \end{thebibliography}

   The 'thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
reference list.

   In the 'article' class, this reference list is labelled 'References'
and the label is stored in macro '\refname'; in the 'report' class, it
is labelled 'Bibliography' and the label is stored in macro '\bibname'.

   You can change the label by redefining the command '\refname' or
'\bibname', whichever is applicable depending on the class:

   * For standard classes whose top level sectioning is '\chapter' (such
     as 'book' and 'report'), the label is in the macro '\bibname';

   * For standard classes whose the top level sectioning is '\section'
     (such as 'article'), the label is in macro '\refname'.

   Typically it is neither necessary nor desirable to directly redefine
'\refname' or '\bibname'; language support packages like 'babel' do
this.

   The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is as
wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands.  It
is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10
references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc.

8.24.1 '\bibitem'
-----------------

Synopsis:

     \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}

   The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL.  If the
LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the
'enumi' counter.  The CITE_KEY is a "citation key" consisting in any
sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a
comma.

   This command writes an entry to the '.aux' file containing the item's
CITE_KEY and LABEL.  When the '.aux' file is read by the
'\begin{document}' command, the item's LABEL is associated with
'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (*note
\cite::) to produce the associated LABEL.

8.24.2 '\cite'
--------------

Synopsis:

     \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}

   The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys (*note
\bibitem::), separated by commas.  This command generates an in-text
citation to the references associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux'
file.

   The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation.
For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.

8.24.3 '\nocite'
----------------

Synopsis:

     \nocite{KEYS}

   The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes KEYS, which is a
list of one or more citation keys, to the '.aux' file.

8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------

If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
your bibliography, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment
(*note thebibliography::).  Instead, you include the lines

     \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
     \bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2}

   The '\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
own.  Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be
produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE'.bst', which defines how
your citations will look.  The standard BIBSTYLE names distributed with
BibTeX are:

'alpha'
     Sorted alphabetically.  Labels are formed from name of author and
     year of publication.
'plain'
     Sorted alphabetically.  Labels are numeric.
'unsrt'
     Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
'abbrv'
     Like 'plain', but more compact labels.

   In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
demands of various publications.  See
<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.

   The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
bibliography.  The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named
'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ..., which should contain your database
in BibTeX format.  Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and
'\nocite' will be listed in the bibliography.

8.25 'theorem'
==============

Synopsis:

     \begin{theorem}
     THEOREM-TEXT
     \end{theorem}

   The 'theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed
by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described
under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).

8.26 'titlepage'
================

Synopsis:

     \begin{titlepage}
       ... text and spacing ...
     \end{titlepage}

   Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading.
The following page will be numbered page one.

   To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
environment you can use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).

   Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical
spacing, is left to the author.

     \begin{titlepage}
     \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
     \begin{center}
       {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
                       title}                  \\[6.5ex]
       {\large\bfseries Author name}           \\
       \vspace{4ex}
       Thesis  submitted to                    \\[5pt]
       \textit{University name}                \\[2cm]
       in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
       \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy}    \\[2ex]
       \textsc{\large Mathematics}             \\[12ex]
       \vfill
       Department of Mathematics               \\
       Address                                 \\
       \vfill
       \today
     \end{center}
     \vspace{\stretch{2}}
     \end{titlepage}

8.27 'verbatim'
===============

Synopsis:

     \begin{verbatim}
     LITERAL-TEXT
     \end{verbatim}

   The 'verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which
LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the '\' character
produces a printed '\'.  It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage
returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a
typewriter.

   The 'verbatim' environment uses a monospaced typewriter-like font
('\tt').

8.27.1 '\verb'
--------------

Synopsis:

     \verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
     \verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR

   The '\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including
special characters and spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.  No
spaces are allowed between '\verb' or '\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR,
which begins and ends the verbatim text.  The delimiter must not appear
in LITERAL-TEXT.

   The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
space" character.

8.28 'verse'
============

Synopsis:

     \begin{verse}
     LINE1 \\
     LINE2 \\
     ...
     \end{verse}

   The 'verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
other uses for it.

   The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are
not indented, and the text is not justified.  Separate the lines of each
stanza with '\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the
stanzas.

9 Line breaking
***************

The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate
your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces.  To produce a
printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
lines must be broken into pages).

   LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.

9.1 '\\'
========

Synopsis:

     \\[MORESPACE]

   or

     \\*[MORESPACE]

   Start a new line.  The optional argument MORESPACE specifies extra
vertical space to be insert before the next line.  This can be a
negative length.  The text before the break is set at its normal length,
that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.

   Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in LaTeX.  In
particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line.  This
command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in a
'tabular' or 'array' environment.

   Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{...}' column in a
'tabular' environment) the '\newline' command is a synonym for '\\'
(*note \newline::).

   In addition to starting a new line, the starred form '\\*' tells
LaTeX not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
'\nobreak'.

     \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
            a tale of woe}

9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
============================

The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
internally) the same as '\\' (followed by '\relax').  So each new line
in the input will also be a new line in the output.

   '\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.

9.3 '\newline'
==============

In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (*note \\::); it
breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.

   Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, in a column with a
specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{...}', '\newline'
will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, it does not
break the entire row.  To break the entire row use '\\' or its
equivalent '\tabularnewline'.

   This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
of the table.

     \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
       Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
     \end{tabular}

   The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.

9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
===============================

The '\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
point.  LaTeX is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds most of
the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect
one.  The '\-' command is used for the exceptional cases.

   When you insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be
hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that
LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.

9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
====================================================

Synopsis:

     \discretionary{PRE-BREAK-TEXT}{POST-BREAK-TEXT}{NO-BREAK-TEXT}

9.6 '\fussy'
============

The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
line breaking.  This usually avoids too much space between words, at the
cost of an occasional overfull box.

   This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command
(*note \sloppy::).

9.7 '\sloppy'
=============

The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.

   Lasts until a '\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).

9.8 '\hyphenation'
==================

Synopsis:

     \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO}

   The '\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a
'-' character in the given words.  The words are separated by spaces.
TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are
tried.  Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.  Some examples (the
default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these
words):

     \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}

9.9 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
=================================

Synopses:

     \linebreak[PRIORITY]
     \nolinebreak[PRIORITY]

   By default, the '\linebreak' ('\nolinebreak') command forces
(prevents) a line break at the current position.  For '\linebreak', the
spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right
margin as usual.

   With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command from
a demand to a request.  The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4.  The
higher the number, the more insistent the request.

10 Page breaking
****************

LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
accumulated to fill up a page.  Usually this happens automatically, but
sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.

10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
=======================

The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all the
pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
input to be printed.  In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
necessary.

10.2 '\clearpage'
=================

The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all the
pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
input to be printed.

10.3 '\newpage'
===============

The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
(*note \clearpage::).

10.4 '\enlargethispage'
=======================

'\enlargethispage{size}'

   '\enlargethispage*{size}'

   Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified
amount; e.g., '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
additional line.

   The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
as much as possible.  This is normally used together with an explicit
'\pagebreak'.

10.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
==================================

Synopses:

     \pagebreak[PRIORITY]
     \nopagebreak[PRIORITY]

   By default, the '\pagebreak' ('\nopagebreak') command forces
(prevents) a page break at the current position.  With '\pagebreak', the
vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it
extends to the normal bottom margin.

   With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the '\pagebreak'
command from a demand to a request.  The number must be a number from 0
to 4.  The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.

11 Footnotes
************

Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.

     Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
     to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
     love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}

   You can place multiple footnotes on a page.  If the text becomes too
long it will flow to the next page.

   You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.

   To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
include a bibliographic style with that behavior.

11.1 '\footnote'
================

Synopsis:

     \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}

   Place a numbered footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.

     There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
     \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
     reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
     ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
     of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
     at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}

   The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the footnote
number.  If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.

   Change how LaTeX shows the footnote counter with something like
'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
\fnsymbol::).  To make this change global put that in the preamble.  If
you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.  By default LaTeX uses arabic numbers.

   LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
paragraph mode).  There are some workarounds; see following sections.

   In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
numbered independently.  They are shown at the bottom of the
environment, not at the bottom of the page.  And by default they are
shown alphabetically.  *Note minipage::.

11.2 '\footnotemark'
====================

Synopsis, one of:

     \footnotemark
     \footnotemark[NUMBER]

   Put the current footnote number in the text.  (See *note
\footnotetext:: for giving the text of the footnote separately.)  The
version with the optional argument NUMBER uses that number to determine
the mark printed.  This command can be used in inner paragraph mode.

   This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the
first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version of 'footnote').

     \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
     \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
       \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
       \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
     \begin{document}
     \maketitle

   If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
it does not.  This produces several consecutive footnote markers
referring to the same footnote.

     The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
     and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
     and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]

11.3 '\footnotetext'
====================

Synopsis, one of:

     \footnotetext{TEXT}
     \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}

   Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote.  This command can
come anywhere after the '\footnotemark' command.  The optional argument
NUMBER changes the displayed footnote number.  The '\footnotetext'
command must appear in outer paragraph mode.

11.4 Footnotes in a table
=========================

Inside a 'table' environment the '\footnote' command does not work.  For
instance, if the code below appears on its own then the footnote simply
disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but nothing is
set at the bottom of the page.

     \begin{center}
          \begin{tabular}{l|l}
          \textsc{Ship}  &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
          \textit{HMS Sophie}     &Master and Commander  \\
          \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain  \\
          \textit{HMS Lively}     &Post Captain \\
          \textit{HMS Surprise}   &A number of books\footnote{Starting with
                                     HMS Surprise.}
          \end{tabular}
     \end{center}

   The solution is to surround the 'tabular' environment with a
'minipage' environment, as here (*note minipage::).

     \begin{center}
       \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
         ... tabular material ...
       \end{minipage}
     \end{center}

   The same technique will work inside a floating 'table' environment
(*note table::).  To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
'tablefootnote' package, as illustrated in this example.  If you put
'\usepackage{tablefootnote}' in the preamble and use the code shown then
the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in sequence with
other footnotes.

     \begin{table}
       \centering
          \begin{tabular}{l|l}
          \textsc{Date}  &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
          1862           &Fort Donelson \\
          1863           &Vicksburg     \\
          1865           &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
          \end{tabular}
         \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
     \end{table}

11.5 Footnotes in section headings
==================================

Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:

     \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}

causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
contents, where it is not likely to be desired.  To have it not appear
on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc' with the 'stable'
option.

     \usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
     ...
     \begin{document}
     ...
     \section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}}

   Note that the '\protect' is gone; including it would cause the
footnote to reappear on the table of contents.

11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
===========================

Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes.  The package
'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
including allow these two, as in this example.

     \usepackage{bigfoot}
     \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
     \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph]   % create class \footnotefrom{}
      ...
     \begin{document}
     ...
     The third theorem is a partial converse of the
     second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
     ...

11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
=====================================

You can refer to a single footnote more than once.  This example uses
the package 'cleverref'.

     \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15]   % this version of package or later
     \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
     ...
     \begin{document}
     ...
     The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
     The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
     But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
     ...

   This solution will work with the package 'hyperref'.  See *note
\footnotemark:: for a simpler solution in the common case of multiple
authors with the same affiliation.

11.8 Footnote parameters
========================

'\footnoterule'
     Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
     page's footnotes.  Default dimensions: '0.4pt' thick (or wide), and
     '0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except
     'slides', where it does not appear).

'\footnotesep'
     The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.
     By default, this is set to the normal strut for '\footnotesize'
     fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space
     between footnotes.  This is '6.65pt' for '10pt', '7.7pt' for
     '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'.

12 Definitions
**************

LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.

12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
====================================

'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
respectively.  Synopses:

       \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
       \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
     \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
     \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}

   The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments
not contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX
terms).

CMD
     Required; '\CMD' is the command name.  For '\newcommand', it must
     not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'.  For
     '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.

NARGS
     Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
     arguments that the command can take, including any optional
     argument.  If this argument is not present, the default is for the
     command to have no arguments.  When redefining a command, the new
     version can have a different number of arguments than the old
     version.

OPTARGDEFAULT
     Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
     defined command '\CMD' is optional, with default value
     OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is
     not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.

     That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets following, as in
     '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN the first "positional parameter"
     '#1' expands MYVAL.  On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called without
     square brackets following, then within DEFN the positional
     parameter '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either
     case, any required arguments will be referred to starting with
     '#2'.

     Omitting '[MYVAL]' in a call is different from having the square
     brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former results in '#1'
     expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
     the empty string.

DEFN
     The text to be substituted for every occurrence of '\CMD'; the
     positional parameter '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
     Nth argument.

   TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
sequence, as in '\cmd '.  If you actually want a space there, one
solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} '; another solution
is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').

   A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text.

   Redefining an existing command is similar:
'\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}'.

   Here's a command definition with one required argument:

     \newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}

Then, '\defref{def:basis}' expands to 'Definition~\ref{def:basis}',
which will ultimately expand to something like 'Definition~3.14'.

   An example with two required arguments: '\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1
\times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.

   An example with an optional argument:

     \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}

Then, '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
gives 'Dear John:'.  And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.

   The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN.  So
'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is problematic; in this sentence,

     The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.

the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics.  Another pair of
braces in the definition is needed, like this:
'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.  Those braces are part of the
definition and thus do define a group.

12.2 '\providecommand'
======================

Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
Synopses:

     \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
     \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}

   If no command of this name already exists then this has the same
effect as '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).  If a
command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
loaded more than once.

12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
========================================

Synopsis, one of:

     \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}
     \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]

   Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize the
new counter to zero.

   The name COUNTERNAME must consists of letters only, and does not
begin with a backslash.  This name must not already be in use by another
counter.

   When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then COUNTERNAME
will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the existing counter
SUPERCOUNTER.  For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within
'section' so that any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with
'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note
\refstepcounter::) then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.

   *Note Counters::, for more information about counters.

12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
======================================

Allocate a new "length" register.  Synopsis:

     \newlength{\ARG}

   This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
backslash ('\').  It creates a new length register named '\ARG', which
is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as '1in plus.2in minus.1in'
(what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register).  The register gets an initial
value of zero.  The control sequence '\ARG' must not already be defined.

   *Note Lengths::, for more about lengths.

12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
====================================

Allocate a "bin" for holding a box.  Synopsis:

     \newsavebox{\CMD}

   Defines '\CMD' to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.  Such a box
is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times (*note Boxes::)
or to measure or manipulate.  The name '\CMD' must start with a
backslash ('\'), and must not be already defined.

   The allocation of a box is global.  This command is fragile (*note
\protect::).

12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
============================================

These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
'\begin{ENV} BODY \end{ENV}'.  Synopses:

        \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
       \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
      \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
     \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}

   The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
contain multiple paragraphs of text.  The body of these environments can
still contain multiple paragraphs.

ENV
     Required; the environment name.  It consists only of letters or the
     '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash ('\').  It
     must not begin with the string 'end'.  For '\newenvironment', the
     name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
     and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined.  For
     '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing
     environment.

NARGS
     Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
     of that the environment will take.  When the environment is used
     these arguments appear after the '\begin', as in
     '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'.  If this argument is not present then
     the default is for the environment to have no arguments.  When
     redefining an environment, the new version can have a different
     number of arguments than the old version.

OPTARGDEFAULT
     Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
     the defined environment is optional, with default value
     OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string).  If this argument is
     not present then the environment does not take an optional
     argument.

     That is, when '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is present in the environment
     definition, if '\begin{ENV}' is used with square brackets
     following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then, within BEGDEFN, the
     positional parameter '#1' expands to MYVAL.  If '\begin{ENV}' is
     called without square brackets following, then, within within
     BEGDEFN, the positional parameter '#1' expands to the default
     OPTARGDEFAULT.  In either case, any required arguments will be
     referred to starting with '#2'.

     Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
     brackets with no contents, as in '[]'.  The former results in '#1'
     expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
     the empty string.

BEGDEFN
     Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
     Within BEGDEF, the Nth positional parameter (i.e., '#N') is
     replaced by the text of the Nth argument.

ENDDEFN
     Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
     This may not contain any positional parameters, so '#N' cannot be
     used here (but see the final example below).

   All environments, that is to say the BEGDEFN code, the environment
body and the ENDDEFN code, are processed within a group.  Thus, in the
first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
and does not extend to material following the environment.

   This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
that it will be set in smaller type:

     \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
       \small\begin{quotation}
     }{%
       \end{quotation}
     }

   This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
that cites the author:

     \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
       \begin{quotation}
       \noindent\textit{#1}:
     }{%
       \end{quotation}
     }

The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'.  In the
document, use the environment like this:

     \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
       ...
     \end{citequote}

   The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
in ENDDEFN, in this case in a box (*note \sbox::):

     \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
     \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
       \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
       \begin{quotation}
     }{%
       \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
       \end{quotation}
     }

12.7 '\newtheorem'
==================

Define a new theorem-like environment.  Synopses:

     \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}
     \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
     \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}

   Using the first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}' creates an
environment that will be labelled with TITLE.  See the first example
below.

   The second form '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]' creates
an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
NUMBERED_WITHIN (its counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
reset).

   The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
optional argument between the two required arguments, will create an
environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
NUMBERED_LIKE.

   You can specify one of NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither,
but not both.

   This command creates a counter named NAME.  In addition, unless the
optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
'\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).

   This declaration is global.  It is fragile (*note \protect::).

   Arguments:

NAME
     The name of the environment.  It must not begin with a backslash
     ('\').  It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
     the command name '\NAME' must not already be defined as anything.

TITLE
     The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
     number.  For example, 'Theorem'.

NUMBERED_WITHIN
     Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
     sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'.  When the
     NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
     counter will also be reset.

     If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
     is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.

NUMBERED_LIKE
     Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
     The new environment will be numbered in sequence with
     NUMBERED_LIKE.

   Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
sequentially.  The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.

     \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
     \begin{document}
     \section{...}
     \begin{defn}
       First def
     \end{defn}

     \section{...}
     \begin{defn}
       Second def
     \end{defn}

   Because the next example specifies the optional argument
NUMBERED_WITHIN to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the
same document body, gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.

     \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
     \begin{document}
     \section{...}
     \begin{defn}
       First def
     \end{defn}

     \section{...}
     \begin{defn}
       Second def
     \end{defn}

   In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
counter as 'defn'.  It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
and 'Definition 2.2'.

     \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
     \newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
     \begin{document}
     \section{...}
     \begin{defn}
       First def
     \end{defn}

     \section{...}
     \begin{thm}
       First thm
     \end{thm}

     \begin{defn}
       Second def
     \end{defn}

12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
=============================================

'\newfont', now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
Synopsis:

     \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}

   This defines a control sequence '\CMD' that will change the current
font.  LaTeX will look on your system for a file named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
The control sequence must must not already be defined.  It must begin
with a backslash ('\').

   This command is obsolete.  It is a low-level command for setting up
an individual font.  Today fonts are almost always defined in families
(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
through the so-called "New Font Selection Scheme", either by using '.fd'
files or through the use of an engine that can access system fonts such
as XeLaTeX (*note TeX engines::).

   But since it is part of LaTeX, here is an explanation: the FONT
DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at clause"; this can
have the form either 'at DIMEN' or 'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of
'1000' means no scaling.  For LaTeX's purposes, all this does is scale
all the character and other font dimensions relative to the font's
design size, which is a value defined in the '.tfm' file.

   This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
characters in each:

     \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
     \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
     \testfontat abc
     \testfontscaled abc

12.9 '\protect'
===============

All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust".  A fragile command
can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
re-reads later are fragile.  This includes material that goes into a
table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc.  Fragile
commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
argument, and many more.  To prevent such commands from breaking, one
solution is to preceded them with the command '\protect'.

   For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
contents.  Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument".  A
command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
code.  Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
'\caption{...}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{...}' command
(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
environments (*note tabular::).

   If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
preceding it with '\protect'.  Every fragile commands must be protected
with their own '\protect'.

   Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command.  Nor can
a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
'\setcounter' command.

   In this example the '\caption' command gives a mysterious error about
an extra curly brace.  Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
command with '\protect'.

     \begin{figure}
       ...
       \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
     \end{figure}

   In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
'.toc' file.  You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
'\protect\(..\protect\)'.

     \begin{document}
     \tableofcontents
     ...
     \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
     ...

12.10 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
=============================================

Synopsis:

     \ignorespaces

   or

     \ignorespacesafterend

   Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
command up until the first non-space character.  The first is a command
from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.

   The 'ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'.  The example below
illustrates.  It allows a user to show the points values for quiz
questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as shown in the
'enumerate' list, users must not put any space between the command and
the question text.

     \newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
     \begin{enumerate}
       \item\points{10}no extra space output here
       \item\points{15} extra space output between the number and the word `extra'
     \end{enumerate}

   The solution is to change to
'\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}'.

   A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.
The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
'\fullname' will reproduce that.

     \makeatletter
     \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
     \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1}       % recall title; put before name
     \makeatother
     \begin{tabular}{|l|}
     \honorific{Mr/Ms}  \fullname{Jones} \\  % no extra space here
     \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones}     % extra space before title
     \end{tabular}

   To fix this, change to
'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}'.

   The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
end of the BEGIN clause, that is, as part of the second argument, as in
'\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{... \ignorespaces}{...}'.

   To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
'\ignorespacesafterend'.  An example is that this will show a much
larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
between the second and third.

     \newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}}
     \begin{eq}
     e=mc^2
     \end{eq}
     \begin{equation}
     F=ma
     \end{equation}
     \begin{equation}
     E=IR
     \end{equation}

   Putting a comment character '%' immediately after the '\end{eq}' will
make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient.  The
solution is to change to
'\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}'.

13 Counters
***********

Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it.  The
name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
no backslash '\'.  Thus, associated with the '\chapter' command is the
'chapter' counter that keeps track of the chapter number.

   Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
classes to control numbering.

     part            paragraph       figure          enumi
     chapter         subparagraph    table           enumii
     section         page            footnote        enumiii
     subsection      equation        mpfootnote      enumiv
     subsubsection

   The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
a minipage (*note minipage::).  The counters 'enumi' through 'enumiv'
are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
nesting (*note enumerate::).

   New counters are created with '\newcounter'.  *Note \newcounter::.

13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
=====================================================================

Print the value of a counter, in a specified style.  For instance, if
the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
source will result in a lower case letter a appearing in the output.

   All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, '\alph{enumi}'.  Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.

'\alph{COUNTER}'
     Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...

'\Alph{COUNTER}'
     Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...

'\arabic{COUNTER}'
     Print in Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ...

'\roman{COUNTER}'
     Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...

'\Roman{COUNTER}'
     Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...

'\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
     Prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
     (conventionally used for labeling footnotes).  The value of COUNTER
     must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.

     Here are the symbols:

     Name                     Command                  Equivalent Unicode
                                                       symbol and/or numeric
                                                       code point
     ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
     asterisk                 '\ast'                   *
     dagger                   '\dagger'                U+2020
     ddagger                  '\ddagger'               U+2021
     section-sign             '\S'                     U+00A7
     paragraph-sign           '\P'                     U+00B6
     double-vert              '\parallel'              U+2016
     double-asterisk          '\ast\ast'               **
     double-dagger            '\dagger\dagger'         U+2020U+2020
     double-ddagger           '\ddagger\ddagger'       U+2021U+2021

13.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
===========================

Synopsis:

     \usecounter{COUNTER}

   In the 'list' environment, when used in the second argument, this
command sets up COUNTER to number the list items.  It initializes
COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called without its
optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by '\refstepcounter',
making its value be the current 'ref' value.  This command is fragile
(*note \protect::).

   Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated
with TESTCOUNTER:

     \newcounter{testcounter}
     \newenvironment{test}{%
       \begin{list}{}{%
         \usecounter{testcounter}
       }
     }{%
       \end{list}
     }

13.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
======================

Synopsis:

     \value{COUNTER}

   This command expands to the value of COUNTER.  It is often used in
'\setcounter' or '\addtocounter', but '\value' can be used anywhere that
LaTeX expects a number.  It must not be preceded by '\protect' (*note
\protect::).

   The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
counter.  *Note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.

   This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.

     \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
     \newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
     \addtocounter{test}{1}

     Test counter is \arabic{test}.
     Other counter is \arabic{other}.

   This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.

     \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
     \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}

13.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
==================================

Synopsis:

     \setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}

   The '\setcounter' command globally sets the value of COUNTER to the
VALUE argument.  Note that the counter name does not start with a
backslash.

   In this example the section value appears as 'V'.

     \setcounter{section}{5}
     Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.

13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
====================================

The '\addtocounter' command globally increments COUNTER by the amount
specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.

   In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.

     \setcounter{section}{5}
     \addtocounter{section}{2}
     Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.

13.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
===============================

The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter'
(*note \stepcounter::): it globally increments the value of COUNTER by
one and resets the value of any counter numbered within it.  (For the
definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)

   In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
the result of '\thecounter'.

   While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
locally, i.e., inside the current group.

13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
============================

The '\stepcounter' command globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all
counters numbered within it.  (For the definition of "counters numbered
within", *note \newcounter::.)

13.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
=============================================

LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month ('\day', 1-31), month of
the year ('\month', 1-12), and year ('\year', Common Era).  When TeX
starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is
running.  They are not updated as the job progresses.

   The related command '\today' produces a string representing the
current day (*note \today::).

14 Lengths
**********

A "length" is a measure of distance.  Many LaTeX commands take a length
as an argument.

   Lengths come in two types.  A "rigid length" (what Plain TeX calls a
"dimen") such as '10pt' cannot contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component.  A
"rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") can contain those, as
with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm'.  These give the ability to stretch or
shrink; the length in the prior sentence could appear in the output as
long as 1.05 cm or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what TeX's
typesetting algorithm finds optimum.

   The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'.  This gives the length infinite
stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in the prior
sentence can be set by TeX to any distance greater than or equal to
1 inch.  TeX actually provides three infinite glue components 'fil',
'fill', and 'filll', such that the later ones overcome the earlier ones,
but only the middle value is ordinarily used.  *Note \hfill::, *Note
\vfill::.

   Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
length, so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.

14.1 Units of length
====================

TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
mode.

'pt'
     Point 1/72.27 inch.  The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
     places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.

'pc'
     Pica, 12 pt

'in'
     Inch, 72.27 pt

'bp'
     Big point, 1/72 inch.  This length is the definition of a point in
     PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.

'cm'
     Centimeter

'mm'
     Millimeter

'dd'
     Didot point, 1.07 pt

'cc'
     Cicero, 12 dd

'sp'
     Scaled point, 1/65536 pt

   Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
of the font.  The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
'0.5em').  Use of these can help make a definition work better across
font changes.  For example, a definition of the vertical space between
list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
definition given in points.

   In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
math symbols family.  *Note Spacing in math mode::.

14.2 '\setlength'
=================

Synopsis:

     \setlength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}

   The '\setlength' sets the value of "length command" '\LEN' to the
VALUE argument which can be expressed in any units that LaTeX
understands, i.e., inches ('in'), millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big
points ('bp'), etc.

14.3 '\addtolength'
===================

Synopsis:

     \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}

   The '\addtolength' command increments a length command '\LEN' by the
amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.

14.4 '\settodepth'
==================

Synopsis:

     \settodepth{\LEN}{TEXT}

   The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
equal to the depth of the TEXT argument.

14.5 '\settoheight'
===================

Synopsis:

     \settoheight{\LEN}{text}

   The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a length command '\LEN'
equal to the height of the 'text' argument.

14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
==============================

Synopsis:

     \settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}

   The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
width of the TEXT argument.

14.7 Predefined lengths
=======================

'\width'

   '\height'

   '\depth'

   '\totalheight'

   These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
box-making commands (*note Boxes::).  They specify the natural width,
etc., of the text in the box.  '\totalheight' equals '\height' +
'\depth'.  To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
size, e.g., say

     \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}

15 Making paragraphs
********************

A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not
containing even a '%'.  A blank line should not appear where a new
paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
a sectioning command.

15.1 '\indent'
==============

'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
'\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation.  It is used to
add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.

   The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode,
otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em'
for '12pt'.

15.2 '\noindent'
================

When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
paragraph indentation, as in this example.

     ... end of the prior paragraph.

     \noindent This paragraph is not indented.

   It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.

   To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble.

15.3 '\parskip'
===============

'\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before
each paragraph.  The default is '0pt plus1pt'.

15.4 Marginal notes
===================

Synopsis:

     \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}

   The '\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin.  The first
line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
where the '\marginpar' occurs.

   When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
placed

   * in the right margin for one-sided layout (option 'oneside', see
     *note Document class options::);
   * in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option 'twoside', see
     *note Document class options::);
   * in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option 'twocolumn',
     see *note Document class options::).

   The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
the opposite (inside) margin.  '\normalmarginpar' places them in the
default position.

   When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin,
and RIGHT is used for the right margin.

   The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
hyphenation there by beginning the node with '\hspace{0pt}'.

   These parameters affect the formatting of the note:

'\marginparpush'
     Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
     documents, '5pt' else.

'\marginparsep'
     Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
     for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else.

'\marginparwidth'
     Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document
     is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in
     each case for a two-sided document.  In two column mode, the
     default is '48pt'.

   The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes
from falling off the bottom of the page.

16 Math formulas
****************

There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:

'math'
     For formulas that appear right in the text.
'displaymath'
     For formulas that appear on their own line.
'equation'
     The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an
     equation number in the right margin.

   The 'math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
the 'displaymath' and 'equation' environments can be used only in
paragraph mode.  The 'math' and 'displaymath' environments are used so
often that they have the following short forms:

     \(...\)   instead of   \begin{math}...\end{math}
     \[...\]   instead of   \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}

   In fact, the 'math' environment is so common that it has an even
shorter form:

     $ ... $   instead of   \(...\)

   The '\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a
bold font.  It is used _outside_ of math mode.  Conversely, the
'\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too
is used _outside_ of math mode.

   The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
summations.  For example:

     $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $

16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
==============================

In math mode, use the caret character '^' to make the EXP appear as a
superscript: '^{EXP}'.  Similarly, in math mode, underscore '_{EXP}'
makes a subscript out of EXP.

   In this example the '0' and '1' appear as subscripts while the '2' is
a superscript.

     \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)

   To have more than one character in EXP use curly braces as in
'e^{-2x}'.

   LaTeX handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
the natural way, so expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{a_0}' will
look right.  It also does the right thing when something has both a
subscript and a superscript.  In this example the '0' appears at the
bottom of the integral sign while the '10' appears at the top.

     \int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx

   You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a
construct such as '{}_t K^2' in math mode (the initial '{}' prevents the
prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
expression).

   Outside of math mode, a construct like 'A
test$_\textnormal{subscript}$' will produce a subscript typeset in text
mode, not math mode.  Note that there are packages specialized for
writing Chemical formulas such as 'mhchem'.

16.2 Math symbols
=================

LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
symbol U+03C0.

   Below is a list of commonly-available symbols.  It is by no means an
exhaustive list.  Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
parenthesis.  Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
be used only in math mode.

   To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
mode, see *note \ensuremath::.

'\|'
     U+2225 Parallel (relation).  Synonym: '\parallel'.

'\aleph'
     U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).

'\alpha'
     U+03B1 Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).

'\amalg'
     U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)

'\angle'
     U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary).  Similar: less-than sign '<' and
     angle bracket '\langle'.

'\approx'
     U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).

'\ast'
     U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
     Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
     Kleene star.  Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
     sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
     reserved for cross-correlation.

'\asymp'
     U+224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation).

'\backslash'
     \ Backslash (ordinary).  Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
     '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.

'\beta'
     U+03B2 Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).

'\bigcap'
     U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator).  Similar:
     binary intersection '\cap'.

'\bigcirc'
     U+26AA Circle, larger (binary).  Similar: function
     composition '\circ'.

'\bigcup'
     U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator).  Similar: binary
     union '\cup'.

'\bigodot'
     U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).

'\bigoplus'
     U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).

'\bigotimes'
     U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).

'\bigtriangledown'
     U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
     (operator).

'\bigtriangleup'
     U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
     (operator).

'\bigsqcup'
     U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).

'\biguplus'
     U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
     (operator).  (Note that the name has only one p.)

'\bigvee'
     U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).

'\bigwedge'
     U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).

'\bot'
     U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set,
     or a contradiction (ordinary).  See also '\top'.

'\bowtie'
     U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).

'\Box'
     U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
     Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the
     'amssymb' package.

'\bullet'
     U+2022 Bullet (binary).  Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.

'\cap'
     U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
     operator '\bigcap'.

'\cdot'
     U+22C5 Multiplication (binary).  Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.

'\chi'
     U+03C7 Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).

'\circ'
     U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary).  Similar:
     variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.

'\clubsuit'
     U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).

'\complement'
     U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
     '$S^\complement$' (ordinary).  Not available in plain TeX.  In
     LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.  Also used:
     '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.

'\cong'
     U+2245 Congruent (relation).

'\coprod'
     U+2210 Coproduct (operator).

'\cup'
     U+222A Union of two sets (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
     operator '\bigcup'.

'\dagger'
     U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).

'\dashv'
     U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation).  Similar:
     turnstile '\vdash'.

'\ddagger'
     U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).

'\Delta'
     U+0394 Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).

'\delta'
     U+03B4 Greek lower case delta (ordinary).

'\Diamond'
     U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary).  Not available in plain
     TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.

'\diamond'
     U+22C4 Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary).  Similar:
     large diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.

'\diamondsuit'
     U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).

'\div'
     U+00F7 Division sign (binary).

'\doteq'
     U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation).  Similar: geometrically
     equal to '\Doteq'.

'\downarrow'
     U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation).  Similar: double line down
     arrow '\Downarrow'.

'\Downarrow'
     U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation).  Similar: single line
     down arrow '\downarrow'.

'\ell'
     U+2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).

'\emptyset'
     U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\varnothing'.

'\epsilon'
     U+03F5 Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary).  Similar to Greek text
     letter.  More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
     epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5.  Related: the set membership relation
     '\in' U+2208.

'\equiv'
     U+2261 Equivalence (relation).

'\eta'
     U+03B7 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\exists'
     U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).

'\flat'
     U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).

'\forall'
     U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).

'\frown'
     U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).

'\Gamma'
     U+0393 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\gamma'
     U+03B3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\ge'
     U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
     for '\geq'.

'\geq'
     U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
     for '\ge'.

'\gets'
     U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation).  Synonym: '\leftarrow'.

'\gg'
     U+226B Much greater than (relation).  Similar: much less
     than '\ll'.

'\hbar'
     U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).

'\heartsuit'
     U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).

'\hookleftarrow'
     U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).

'\hookrightarrow'
     U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).

'\iff'
     U+27F7 If and only if (relation).  It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
     a '\thickmuskip' on either side.

'\Im'
     U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary).  See: real part '\Re'.

'\in'
     U+2208 Set element (relation).  See also: lower case lunate
     epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
     epsilon '\varepsilon'.

'\infty'
     U+221E Infinity (ordinary).

'\int'
     U+222B Integral (operator).

'\iota'
     U+03B9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\Join'
     U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation).  Not available in Plain
     TeX.

'\kappa'
     U+03BA Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\Lambda'
     U+039B Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\lambda'
     U+03BB Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\land'
     U+2227 Logical and (binary).  This is a synonym for '\wedge'.  See
     also logical or '\lor'.

'\langle'
     U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening).  Similar:
     less-than '<'.  Matches '\rangle'.

'\lbrace'
     U+007B Left curly brace (opening).  Synonym: '\{'.
     Matches '\rbrace'.

'\lbrack'
     U+005B Left square bracket (opening).  Synonym: '['.
     Matches '\rbrack'.

'\lceil'
     U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
     bottom shaved off (opening).  Matches '\rceil'.

'\le'
     U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
     for '\leq'.

'\leadsto'
     U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation).  Not available in plain
     TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.  To get this
     symbol outside of math mode you can put
     '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
     then use '\Leadsto' instead.

'\Leftarrow'
     U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation).  Similar:
     single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.

'\leftarrow'
     U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation).  Synonym: '\gets'.
     Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.

'\leftharpoondown'
     U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).

'\leftharpoonup'
     U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).

'\Leftrightarrow'
     U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
     Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.

'\leftrightarrow'
     U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation).  Similar:
     double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.

'\leq'
     U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation).  This is a synonym
     for '\le'.

'\lfloor'
     U+230A Left floor bracket (opening).  Matches: '\floor'.

'\lhd'
     U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).  Not
     available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
     package.  For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb'
     and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
     spacing).

'\ll'
     U+226A Much less than (relation).  Similar: much greater
     than '\gg'.

'\lnot'
     U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary).  Synonym: '\neg'.

'\longleftarrow'
     U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation).  Similar: long
     double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.

'\longleftrightarrow'
     U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation).  Similar:
     long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.

'\longmapsto'
     U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
     (relation).  Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.

'\longrightarrow'
     U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation).  Similar: long
     double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.

'\lor'
     U+2228 Logical or (binary).  Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.

'\mapsto'
     U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
     (relation).  Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.

'\mho'
     U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
     Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the
     'amssymb' package.

'\mid'
     U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation).  A typical use of
     '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.

     Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
     symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
     you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
     i.e., footnote symbols.  For absolute value, see the entry
     for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.

'\models'
     U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
     (relation).  Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.

'\mp'
     U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).

'\mu'
     U+03BC Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\nabla'
     U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).

'\natural'
     U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).

'\ne'
     U+2260 Not equal (relation).  Synonym: '\neq'.

'\nearrow'
     U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).

'\neg'
     U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary).  Synonym: '\lnot'.  Sometimes
     instead used for negation: '\sim'.

'\neq'
     U+2260 Not equal (relation).  Synonym: '\ne'.

'\ni'
     U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
     Synonym: '\owns'.  Similar: is a member of '\in'.

'\not'
     U+0020U+00A0U+0338 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
     following operator (relation).

     Many negated operators that don't require '\not' are available,
     particularly with the 'amssymb' package.  For example, '\notin' is
     probably typographically preferable to '\not\in'.

'\notin'
     U+2209 Not an element of (relation).  Similar: not subset
     of '\nsubseteq'.

'\nu'
     U+03BD Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\nwarrow'
     U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).

'\odot'
     U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
     operator '\bigodot'.

'\oint'
     U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
     (operator).

'\Omega'
     U+03A9 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\omega'
     U+03C9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\ominus'
     U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).

'\oplus'
     U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary).  Similar: variable-sized
     operator '\bigoplus'.

'\oslash'
     U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).

'\otimes'
     U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary).  Similar:
     variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.

'\owns'
     U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
     Synonym: '\ni'.  Similar: is a member of '\in'.

'\parallel'
     U+2225 Parallel (relation).  Synonym: '\|'.

'\partial'
     U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).

'\perp'
     U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation).  Similar: '\bot' uses the same
     glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
     ordinary.

'\phi'
     U+03D5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\varphi' U+03C6.

'\Pi'
     U+03A0 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\pi'
     U+03C0 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\varpi' U+03D6.

'\pm'
     U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).

'\prec'
     U+227A Precedes (relation).  Similar: less than '<'.

'\preceq'
     U+2AAF Precedes or equals (relation).  Similar: less than or
     equals '\leq'.

'\prime'
     U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).  Typically
     used as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$'
     produce the same result.  An advantage of the second is that
     '$f'''$' produces the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
     '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing.  You can
     only use '\prime' in math mode.  Using the right single quote '''
     in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).

'\prod'
     U+220F Product (operator).

'\propto'
     U+221D Is proportional to (relation)

'\Psi'
     U+03A8 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\psi'
     U+03C8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\rangle'
     U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).  Similar:
     greater than '>'.  Matches:'\langle'.

'\rbrace'
     U+007D Right curly brace (closing).  Synonym: '\}'.
     Matches '\lbrace'.

'\rbrack'
     U+005D Right square bracket (closing).  Synonym: ']'.
     Matches '\lbrack'.

'\rceil'
     U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing).  Matches '\lceil'.

'\Re'
     U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
     Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
     this, load the 'amsfonts' package.

'\restriction'
     U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).
     Synonym: '\upharpoonright'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX
     you need to load the 'amssymb' package.

'\revemptyset'
     U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary).  Related:
     '\varnothing'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to
     load the 'stix' package.

'\rfloor'
     U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
     off (closing).  Matches '\lfloor'.

'\rhd'
     U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).  Not
     available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
     package.  For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
     'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so
     gives better spacing).

'\rho'
     U+03C1 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\varrho' U+03F1.

'\Rightarrow'
     U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
     Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.

'\rightarrow'
     U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
     Synonym: '\to'.  Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.

'\rightharpoondown'
     U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).

'\rightharpoonup'
     U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).

'\rightleftharpoons'
     U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).

'\searrow'
     U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).

'\setminus'
     U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \ (binary).
     Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also '\textbackslash' outside
     of math mode.

'\sharp'
     U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).

'\Sigma'
     U+03A3 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\sigma'
     U+03C3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\varsigma' U+03C2.

'\sim'
     U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).

'\simeq'
     U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).

'\smallint'
     U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
     display (operator).

'\smile'
     U+2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).

'\spadesuit'
     U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).

'\sqcap'
     U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary).  Similar:
     intersection 'cap'.

'\sqcup'
     U+2294 Square union symbol (binary).  Similar: union 'cup'.
     Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.

'\sqsubset'
     U+228F Square subset symbol (relation).  Similar: subset '\subset'.
     Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to load the
     'amssymb' package.

'\sqsubseteq'
     U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary).  Similar: subset or
     equal to '\subseteq'.

'\sqsupset'
     U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation).  Similar:
     superset '\supset'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need
     to load the 'amssymb' package.

'\sqsupseteq'
     U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary).  Similar: superset
     or equal '\supseteq'.

'\star'
     U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
     operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
     Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
     six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
     as with the Kleene star.

'\subset'
     U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).

'\subseteq'
     U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).

'\succ'
     U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation).  Similar: is less
     than '>'.

'\succeq'
     U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation).  Similar: less than or
     equal to '\leq'.

'\sum'
     U+2211 Summation (operator).  Similar: Greek capital
     sigma '\Sigma'.

'\supset'
     U+2283 Superset (relation).

'\supseteq'
     U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).

'\surd'
     U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary).  The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
     typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
     to cover the argument.

'\swarrow'
     U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).

'\tau'
     U+03C4 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\theta'
     U+03B8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The variant form is
     '\vartheta' U+03D1.

'\times'
     U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary).  See
     also '\cdot'.

'\to'
     U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
     Synonym: '\rightarrow'.

'\top'
     U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary).
     See also '\bot'.

'\triangle'
     U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).

'\triangleleft'
     U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
     Similar: '\lhd'.  For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
     'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
     gives better spacing).

'\triangleright'
     U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary).  For the normal
     subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
     use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
     spacing).

'\unlhd'
     U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
     triangle, with a line under (binary).  Not available in plain TeX.
     In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.  For the normal
     subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
     is a relation and so gives better spacing).

'\unrhd'
     U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
     triangle, with a line under (binary).  Not available in plain TeX.
     In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.  For the normal
     subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
     is a relation and so gives better spacing).

'\Uparrow'
     U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation).  Similar:
     single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.

'\uparrow'
     U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
     Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.

'\Updownarrow'
     U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
     Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
     arrow '\updownarrow'.

'\updownarrow'
     U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
     Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
     arrow '\Updownarrow'.

'\upharpoonright'
     U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
     Synonym: '\restriction'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you
     need to load the 'amssymb' package.

'\uplus'
     U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
     middle (binary).  Similar: union '\cup'.  Related: variable-sized
     operator '\biguplus'.

'\Upsilon'
     U+03A5 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\upsilon'
     U+03C5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\varepsilon'
     U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary).  This is more widely
     used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
     '\epsilon' U+03F5.  Related: set membership '\in'.

'\vanothing'
     U+2205 Empty set symbol.  Similar: '\emptyset'.  Related:
     '\revemptyset'.  Not available in plain TeX.  In LaTeX you need to
     load the 'amssymb' package.

'\varphi'
     U+03C6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
     non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.

'\varpi'
     U+03D6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
     non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.

'\varrho'
     U+03F1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
     non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.

'\varsigma'
     U+03C2 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
     non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.

'\vartheta'
     U+03D1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary).  The
     non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.

'\vdash'
     U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
     Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.

'\vee'
     U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary).  Related: logical
     and '\wedge'.  Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.

'\Vert'
     U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary).  Similar: vertical single
     bar '\vert'.

     For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
     '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}' to your preamble.
     This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars
     that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
     write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
     the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
     with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
     argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
     COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
     the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.

'\vert'
     U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary).  Similar: double-line
     vertical bar '\Vert'.  For such that, as in the definition of a
     set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.

     For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
     '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' to your preamble.
     This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars
     that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
     write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
     of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
     with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
     the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
     COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
     set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.

'\wedge'
     U+2227 Logical and (binary).  Synonym: '\land'.  See also logical
     or '\vee'.  Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.

'\wp'
     U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).

'\wr'
     U+2240 Wreath product (binary).

'\Xi'
     U+039E Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\xi'
     U+03BE Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

'\zeta'
     U+03B6 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

16.3 Math functions
===================

These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
spacing.

'\arccos'
     \arccos

'\arcsin'
     \arcsin

'\arctan'
     \arctan

'\arg'
     \arg

'\bmod'
     Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y)

'\cos'
     \cos

'\cosh'
     \cosh

'\cot'
     \cot

'\coth'
     \coth

'\csc'
     \csc

'\deg'
     \deg

'\det'
     \det

'\dim'
     \dim

'\exp'
     \exp

'\gcd'
     \gcd

'\hom'
     \hom

'\inf'
     \inf

'\ker'
     \ker

'\lg'
     \lg

'\lim'
     \lim

'\liminf'
     \liminf

'\limsup'
     \limsup

'\ln'
     \ln

'\log'
     \log

'\max'
     \max

'\min'
     \min

'\pmod'
     parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1)

'\Pr'
     \Pr

'\sec'
     \sec

'\sin'
     \sin

'\sinh'
     \sinh

'\sup'
     \sup

'\tan'
     \tan

'\tanh'
     \tanh

16.4 Math accents
=================

LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in
math.  These are different from accents in normal text (*note
Accents::).

'\acute'
     Math acute accent: \acute{x}.

'\bar'
     Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}.

'\breve'
     Math breve accent: \breve{x}.

'\check'
     Math ha'c<ek (check) accent: \check{x}.

'\ddot'
     Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}.

'\dot'
     Math dot accent: \dot{x}.

'\grave'
     Math grave accent: \grave{x}.

'\hat'
     Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}.

'\imath'
     Math dotless i.

'\jmath'
     Math dotless j.

'\mathring'
     Math ring accent: x*.

'\tilde'
     Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}.

'\vec'
     Math vector symbol: \vec{x}.

'\widehat'
     Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}.

'\widetilde'
     Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}.

16.5 Spacing in math mode
=========================

In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces that you use in the
source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal rules
for mathematics texts.

   Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math
unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
math symbols family (*note Units of length::).  LaTeX provides the
following commands for use in math mode:

'\;'
     Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'.  The longer name is '\thickspace'.
     Math mode only.

'\:'
'\>'
     Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.  The longer name is
     '\medspace'.  Math mode only.

'\,'
     Normally '3mu'.  The longer name is '\thinspace'.  This can be used
     in both math mode and text mode.  *Note \thinspace::.

'\!'
     A negative thin space.  Normally '-3mu'.  Math mode only.

'\quad'
     This is 18mu, that is, 1em.  This is often used for space
     surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
     between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment.  It is
     available in both text and math mode.

'\qquad'
     A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em.  It is available in both
     text and math mode.

   In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
infinitesimal.

     \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx

16.6 Math miscellany
====================

'\*'
     A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
     allowed.  Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated
     by a space, while in the case of a break a U+00D7 symbol is printed
     immediately before the break.  So

          \documentclass{article}
          \begin{document}
          Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\)
          through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is
          equal to zero.
          \end{document}

     will make that sort of output (the ellipsis '[...]' is here to show
     the line break at the same place as in a TeX output):

          Now A_3 = 0, [...] A_1 through A_4, that is A_1 A_2 \times
          A_3 A_4, is equal to zero.

'\cdots'
     A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the
     line.

'\ddots'
     A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots.

'\frac{NUM}{DEN}'
     Produces the fraction NUM divided by DEN.

'\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
     The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a "null delimiter",
     producing no output.  The delimiters are sized according to the
     math in between.  Example: '\left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]'.

'\mathdollar'
     Dollar sign in math mode: $.

'\mathellipsis'
     Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: ....

'\mathparagraph'
     Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: U+00B6.

'\mathsection'
     Section sign in math mode.

'\mathsterling'
     Sterling sign in math mode: #.

'\mathunderscore'
     Underscore in math mode: _.

'\overbrace{MATH}'
     Generates a brace over MATH.  For example,
     '\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}'.

'\overline{TEXT}'
     Generates a horizontal line over TEX.  For example,
     '\overline{x+y}'.

'\sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}'
     Produces the representation of the square root of ARG.  The
     optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce.  For
     example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'.

'\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
     Puts TEXT above RELATION.  For example,
     '\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.

'\underbrace{MATH}'
     Generates MATH with a brace underneath.  For example,
     '\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}'

'\underline{TEXT}'
     Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be
     underlined.  The line is always below the text, taking account of
     descenders.

'\vdots'
     Produces a vertical ellipsis.

17 Modes
********

When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
modes:

   * Paragraph mode
   * Math mode
   * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short

   Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
commands.

   "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
processing ordinary text.  In this mode, LaTeX breaks the input text
into lines and breaks the lines into pages.

   LaTeX is in "math mode" when it's generating a mathematical formula,
either displayed math or within a line.

   In "LR mode", as in paragraph mode, LaTeX considers the output that
it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them.  However,
unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX keeps going from left to right; it never
starts a new line in LR mode.  Even if you put a hundred words into an
'\mbox', LaTeX would keep typesetting them from left to right inside a
single box (and then most likely complain because the resulting box was
too wide to fit on the line).  LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making
a box with an '\mbox' command.  You can get it to enter a different mode
inside the box--for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a
formula in the box.

   There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
making a box that put LaTeX into paragraph mode.  The box made by one of
these commands or environments will be called a 'parbox'.  When LaTeX is
in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner
paragraph mode" (no page breaks).  Its normal paragraph mode, which it
starts out in, is called "outer paragraph mode".

17.1 '\ensuremath'
==================

Synopsis:

     \ensuremath{FORMULA}

   The '\ensuremath' command ensures that FORMULA is typeset in math
mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used.

   For instance:

     \documentclass{report}
     \newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}}
     \begin{document}
     Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ...
     \end{document}

   One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that
they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for
'\leadsto':

     \documentclass{report}
     \usepackage{amssymb}
     \newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{}
     \let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto
     \renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}}
     \begin{document}
     All roads \leadsto\ Rome.
     \end{document}

18 Page styles
**************

The '\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
page's head and foot.  The page style determines what goes in them.

18.1 '\maketitle'
=================

The '\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title
page--except in the 'article' class, where the title is placed at the
top of the first page.  Information used to produce the title is
obtained from the following declarations:

'\author{NAME \and NAME2}'
     The '\author' command declares the document author(s), where the
     argument is a list of authors separated by '\and' commands.  Use
     '\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example,
     to give the author's institution or address.

'\date{TEXT}'
     The '\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date.  With
     no '\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used.

'\thanks{TEXT}'
     The '\thanks' command produces a '\footnote' to the title, usually
     used for credit acknowledgements.

'\title{TEXT}'
     The '\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document.
     Use '\\' to force a line break, as usual.

18.2 '\pagenumbering'
=====================

Synopsis:

     \pagenumbering{STYLE}

   Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE; also resets
the page number to 1.  The STYLE argument is one of the following:

'arabic'
     arabic numerals

'roman'
     lowercase Roman numerals

'Roman'
     uppercase Roman numerals

'alph'
     lowercase letters

'Alph'
     uppercase letters

18.3 '\pagestyle'
=================

Synopsis:

     \pagestyle{STYLE}

   The '\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are
typeset from the current page onwards.  Values for STYLE:

'plain'
     Just a plain page number.

'empty'
     Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.

'headings'
     Put running headers on each page.  The document style specifies
     what goes in the headers.

'myheadings'
     Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
     commands.

   Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':

'\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}'
     Sets both the left and the right heading.  A "left-hand heading"
     (LEFT) is generated by the last '\markboth' command before the end
     of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT) is generated by
     the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on the page if
     there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.

'\markright{RIGHT}'
     Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.

18.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
============================

The '\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
'\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to
STYLE for the current page only.

19 Spaces
*********

LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.

19.1 '\hspace'
==============

Synopsis:

     \hspace{LENGTH}
     \hspace*{LENGTH}

   Add the horizontal space given by LENGTH.  The LENGTH is a rubber
length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, in any
unit that LaTeX understands (*note Lengths::).

   This command can add both positive and negative space; adding
negative space is like backspacing.

   Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both.
This command's starred version '\hspace*{...}' puts a non-discardable
invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
output.

   This example make a one-line paragraph that puts 'Name:' an inch from
the right margin.

     \noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}

19.2 '\hfill'
=============

Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but can stretch
horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).

   The command '\hfill' is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}'.  For space
that does not disappear at line breaks use '\hspace*{\fill}' instead
(*note \hspace::).

19.3 '\spacefactor'
===================

Synopsis:

     \spacefactor=INTEGER

   While LaTeX is making the page, to give the lines the best appearance
it may stretch or shrink the gaps between words.  The '\spacefactor'
command (from Plain TeX) allows you to change the LaTeX's default
behavior.

   After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
parameter called the "space factor".  If the next thing in the input is
a space then this parameter affects how much of a horizontal gap LaTeX
will have it span.  (This gap is not a character; it is called
"interword glue".)  A larger space factor means that the glue gap can
stretch more and shrink less.

   Normally, the space factor is 1000; this value is in effect following
most characters, and any non-character box or math formula.  But it is
3000 after a period, exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000
after a colon, 1500 after a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a
right parenthesis or bracket, or closing double quote or single quote.
Finally, it is 999 after a capital letter.

   If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
3.3333 points).  Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
then TeX adds the font's extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font's normal stretch value
is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
1.11111 points).  In short, compared to a normal space, such as the
space following a word ending in a lowercase letter, inter-sentence
spacing has a fixed extra space added and then the space can stretch 3
times as much and shrink 1/3 as much.

   The rules for how TeX uses space factors are even more complex
because they play two more roles.  In practice, there are two
consequences.  First, if a period or other punctuation is followed by a
close parenthesis or close double quote then its effect is still in
place, that is, the following glue will have increased stretch and
shrink.  Second, conversely, if punctuation comes after a capital letter
then its effect is not in place so you get an ordinary space.  For how
to adjust to this second case, for instance if an abbreviation does not
end in a capital letter, *note \(SPACE) and \@::.

19.3.1 '\(SPACE)' and '\@'
--------------------------

Here, '\(SPACE)' means a backslash followed by a space.  These commands
mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either ending a
sentence or as ending an abbreviation.

   By default, in justifying a line LaTeX adjusts the space after a
sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
colon) more than the space between words.  *Note \spacefactor::.  As
described there, LaTeX assumes that the period ends a sentence unless it
is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it takes that period for
part of an abbreviation.  Note that if a sentence-ending period is
immediately followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single
or double quote, then the space effect of that period follows through
that parenthesis or quote.

   So: if you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is
not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space ('\ ') or a tie
('~') or a '\@'.  Examples are 'Nat.\ Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean',
and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note that in the last the '\@' comes
before the closing parenthesis).

   In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
period that does end the sentence, then put '\@' before the period.  For
example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have correct inter-sentence spacing
after the period.

   For another use of '\(SPACE)', *note \(SPACE) after control
sequence::.

19.3.2 '\frenchspacing'
-----------------------

This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat inter-sentence
spacing in the same way as interword spacing.

   In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions,
including English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or
after other punctuation marks) more than the space between words.
Following this declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.

   Revert to the default behavior by declaring '\nonfrenchspacing'.

19.3.3 '\normalsfcodes'
-----------------------

Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default.

19.4 '\ ' after control sequence
================================

The '\ ' command is often used after control sequences to keep them from
gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'.  And, under
normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to '\ '.
For another use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.

   Some people prefer to use '{}' for the same purpose, as in '\TeX{} is
nice'.  This has the advantage that you can always write it the same
way, namely '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
punctuation mark.  Compare:

     \TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.

     \TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.

   Some individual commands, notably those defined with the 'xspace',
package do not follow the standard behavior.

19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
===============================

'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
of an em.  This is the proper space to use between nested quotes, as in
'".

19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
===================================

The '\/' command produces an "italic correction".  This is a small space
defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the
character colliding with whatever follows.  The italic f character
typically has a large italic correction value.

   If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary
to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
very small height.  However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
normal letters, it can help.  Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the 'f's
are nicely separated) with f: f;.

   When changing fonts with commands such as '\textit{italic text}' or
'{\itshape italic text}', LaTeX will automatically insert an italic
correction if appropriate (*note Font styles::).

   Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
correction.  Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space
after the 'f') with pdfTeX.

   There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
done in a different way.

19.7 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
==========================

Produce an infinite rubber length (*note Lengths::) filled with a
horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
space.

   When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that
is left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled
with evenly spaced dots.

     \noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge

   To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
start or end.

   To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
with '\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
1pt\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to
1pt.  Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
'\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@ 1.00em{\hss .\hss
}\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.

19.8 '\addvspace'
=================

'\addvspace{LENGTH}'

   Add a vertical space of height LENGTH, which is a rubber length
(*note Lengths::).  However, if vertical space has already been added to
the same point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command then
this command will not add more space than what is needed to make the
natural length of the total vertical space equal to LENGTH.

   Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
environment that starts a new paragraph.  For instance, a Theorem
environment is defined to begin and end with '\addvspace{...}' so that
two consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.

   This command is fragile (*note \protect::).

   The error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' means that you
were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
change that is to precede this command with a '\par' command.

19.9 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
===================================

These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the
document class.

'\bigskip'
     The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
     space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and
     'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt').

'\medskip'
     The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
     line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the 'book' and
     'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt').

'\smallskip'
     The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
     of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the
     'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt').

19.10 '\vfill'
==============

End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length (*note
Lengths::) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as
needed.

   It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
'\vfill' ends the current paragraph, whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
infinite vertical space below its line irrespective of the paragraph
structure.  In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
to circumvent this see *note \vspace::.

   In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the third 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
halfway between them.

     \begin{document}
     Lost Dog!
     \vfill
     Lost Dog!
     \vfill
     Lost Dog!
     \end{document}

19.11 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
=======================

Synopsis, one of these two:

     \vspace{LENGTH}
     \vspace*{LENGTH}

   Add the vertical space LENGTH.  This can be negative or positive, and
is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).

   LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vspace' at a page break, that
is, at the top or bottom of a page.  The starred version '\vspace*{...}'
causes the space to stay.

   If '\vspace' is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
horizontal mode), the space is inserted _after_ the line with the
'\vspace' command.  A new paragraph is not started.

   In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
the page, with at least one inch of space below each.

     \begin{document}
     1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
     \vspace{1in plus 1fill}

     2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
     \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
     \end{document}

20 Boxes
********

All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be
used in the arguments of the box-making commands.

20.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
==================

The '\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
created by its argument.  The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can
be used to prevent hyphenation.

20.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
============================

Synopses:

     \fbox{TEXT}
     \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}

   The '\fbox' and '\framebox' commands are like '\mbox', except that
they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.

   In addition, the '\framebox' command allows for explicit
specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a
dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument.

   Both commands produce a rule of thickness '\fboxrule' (default
'0.4pt'), and leave a space of '\fboxsep' (default '3pt') between the
rule and the contents of the box.

   *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the '\framebox' command in the
'picture' environment.

20.3 'lrbox'
============

Synopsis:

     \begin{lrbox}{\CMD}
       TEXT
     \end{lrbox}

   This is the environment form of *note '\sbox': \sbox.

   The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box '\CMD', which
must have been declared with '\newsavebox'.

20.4 '\makebox'
===============

Synopsis:

     \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}

   The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
TEXT specified.  The width of the box can be overridden by the optional
WIDTH argument.  The position of the text within the box is determined
by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:

'c'
     Centered (default).
'l'
     Flush left.
'r'
     Flush right.
's'
     Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
     stretchable space for this to work.

   '\makebox' is also used within the 'picture' environment *note
\makebox (picture)::.

20.5 '\parbox'
==============

Synopsis:

     \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT}

   The '\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
"paragraph mode".  It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
with nothing fancy inside.  In particular, you shouldn't use any
paragraph-making environments inside a '\parbox' argument.  For larger
pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
environment, you should use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).

   '\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:

WIDTH
     the width of the parbox;
TEXT
     the text that goes inside the parbox.

   By default LaTeX will position vertically a parbox so its center
lines up with the center of the surrounding text line.  When the
optional POSITION argument is present and equal either to 't' or 'b',
this allows you respectively to align either the top or bottom line in
the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text.  You may also
specify 'm' for POSITION to get the default behaviour.

   The optional HEIGHT argument overrides the natural height of the box.

   The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the
box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used.

't'
     text is placed at the top of the box.
'c'
     text is centered in the box.
'b'
     text is placed at the bottom of the box.
's'
     stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable
     space for this to work.

20.6 '\raisebox'
================

Synopsis:

     \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{TEXT}

   The '\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT.  The first mandatory
argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a
negative amount).  TEXT itself is processed in LR mode.

   The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions.  If they are
specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the
baseline (HEIGHT) or below (DEPTH), ignoring its natural height and
depth.

20.7 '\savebox'
===============

Synopsis:

     \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}

   This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with '\makebox' (*note
\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves
it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with
'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).

20.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
===========================

Synopsis:

     \sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}

   '\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with '\mbox' (*note \mbox::)
except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal
output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD.  \BOXCMD must have been
previously declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).

20.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD}'
=======================

Synopsis:

     \usebox{\BOXCMD}

   '\usebox' produces the box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by
a '\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).

21 Color
********

You can add color to text, rules, etc.  You can also have color in a box
or on an entire page and write text on top of it.

   Color support comes as an additional package.  So all the commands
below will only work if your document preamble contains
'\usepackage{color}', that brings in the standard package.

   Many other packages also supplement LaTeX's color abilities.
Particularly worth mentioning is 'xcolor', which is widely used and
significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
'HTML' and 'Hsb' color models.

21.1 Color package options
==========================

Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):

     \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}

   When you load the 'color' package there are two kinds of available
options.

   The first specifies the "printer driver".  LaTeX doesn't contain
information about different output systems but instead depends on
information stored in a file.  Normally you should not specify the
driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
default.  One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
across systems.  For completeness we include a list of the drivers.  The
currently relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex',
'pdftex', 'xetex'.  The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases
for 'dvips' (and 'xdvi' is monochrome).  Ones that should not be used
for new systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone').

   The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.

'monochrome'
     Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
     do not generate color either.

'dvipsnames'
     Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
     particularly in legacy documents.  These color names were
     originally provided by the 'dvips' driver, giving the option name.

'nodvipsnames'
     Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
     memory space.

21.2 Color models
=================

A "color model" is a way of representing colors.  LaTeX's capabilities
depend on the printer driver.  However, the 'pdftex', 'xetex', and
'luatex' printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used.  The
models below work for those drivers.  All but one of these is also
supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.

   Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive.  Additive
mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
of red, green, and blue produces white.  Subtractive mixes pigments,
such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
and yellow makes black.

'cmyk'
     A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
     inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
     is magenta, and the others are yellow and black.  A number value of
     0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity.  This
     model is often used in color printing.  It is a subtractive model.

'gray'
     A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive.  The colors are
     shades of grey.  The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.

'rgb'
     A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
     inclusive.  The first number is the intensity of the red component,
     the second is green, and the third the blue.  A number value of 0
     means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
     intensity.  This is an additive model.

'RGB'
     ('pdftex', 'xetex', 'luatex' drivers) A comma-separated list with
     three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive.  This model is a
     convenience for using 'rgb' since outside of LaTeX colors are often
     described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
     The values entered here are converted to the 'rgb' model by
     dividing by 255.

'named'
     Colors are accessed by name, such as 'PrussianBlue'.  The list of
     names depends on the driver, but all support the names 'black',
     'blue', 'cyan', 'green', 'magenta', 'red', 'white', and 'yellow'
     (See the 'dvipsnames' option in *note Color package options::).

21.3 Commands for color
=======================

These are the commands available with the 'color' package.

21.3.1 Define colors
--------------------

Synopsis:

     \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}

   Give the name NAME to the color.  For example, after
'\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}' you can use that color name
with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.

   This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
and not be misleading.

     \definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131}    % RGB needs pdflatex
     \newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}

   Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
class or style, rather than in the document body.

21.3.2 Colored text
-------------------

Synopses:

     \textcolor{NAME}{...}
     \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}

   or

     \color{NAME}
     \color[COLOR MODEL]{SPECIFICATION}

   The affected text gets the color.  This line

     \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!

   causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black.
You can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
that we just used the builtin color 'magenta'.

     \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
     I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.

   The two '\textcolor' and '\color' differ in that the first is a
command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument.  Often
this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit.  The second
form is a declaration, as in 'The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
cheese', so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
environment.  This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
where it colors everything inside the 'center' environment, including
the vertical and horizontal lines.

     \begin{center} \color{blue}
       \begin{tabular}{l|r}
         UL &UR \\ \hline
         LL &LR
       \end{tabular}
     \end{center}

   You can use color in equations.  A document might have
'\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}' in the preamble, and then
contain this equation.

     \begin{equation}
       \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
     \end{equation}

   Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or
style but sometimes you want a one-off.  Those are the second forms in
the synopses.

     Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team

   The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
Color models::).  For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
takes only one.

     The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.

   Colors inside colors do not combine.  Thus

     \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}

   has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.

21.3.3 Colored boxes
--------------------

Synopses:

     \colorbox{NAME}{...}
     \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}

   or

     \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
     \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR SPECIFICATION}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}

   Make a box with the stated background color.  The '\fcolorbox'
command puts a frame around the box.  For instance this

     Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}

   makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
depth and height from the '\strut' (so the depth is '-.3\baselineskip'
and the height is '\baselineskip').  This puts white text on a blue
background.

     \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}

   The '\fcolorbox' commands use the same parameters as '\fbox' (*note
\fbox and \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
surrounding rule.  LaTeX's defaults are '0.4pt' and '3pt', respectively.

   This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points.  Note
that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
of the second line.

     {\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
     \fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}

21.3.4 Colored pages
--------------------

Synopses:

     \pagecolor{NAME}
     \pagecolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
     \nopagecolor

   The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent
pages, to the color.  For an explanation of the specification in the
second form *note Colored text::.  The third returns the background to
normal, which is a transparent background.  (If that is not supported
use '\pagecolor{white}', although that will make a white background
rather than the default transparent background.)

      ...
     \pagecolor{cyan}
      ...
     \nopagecolor

22 Graphics
***********

You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document.
You need an additional package, which comes standard with LaTeX.  This
example is the short how-to.

     \include{graphicx}  % goes in the preamble
       ...
     \includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}

   To use the commands described here your document preamble must
contain either '\usepackage{graphicx}' or '\usepackage{graphics}'.  Most
of the time, 'graphicx' is the better choice.

   Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector.  LaTeX can use
both.  In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
in an array, describing what color it is.  An example is a photograph,
in JPG format.  In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
instructions such as 'draw a circle with this radius and that center'.
An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote program, in PDF
format.  Generally vector graphics are more useful because you can
rescale their size without pixelation or other problems, and because
they often have a smaller size.

   There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
LaTeX document.  For example, these allow you to use the same fonts as
in your document.  LaTeX comes with a 'picture' environment (*note
picture::) that has simple capabilities.  Besides that, there are other
ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document.  Two such
systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages.  There are also systems
external to LaTeX, that generate a graphic that you include using the
commands of this chapter.  Two that use a programming language are
Asymptote and MetaPost.  One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
see their documentation.

22.1 Graphics package options
=============================

Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):

     \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphics}

   or

     \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphicx}

   The 'graphicx' package has a format for optional arguments to the
'\includegraphics' command that is convenient (it is the key-value
format), so it is the better choice for new documents.  When you load
the 'graphics' or 'graphicx' package with '\usepackage' there are two
kinds of available options.

   The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
output systems but instead depends on information stored in a "printer
driver" file.  Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
document, and instead rely on your system's default.  One advantage of
this is that it makes the document portable across systems.

   For completeness here is a list of the drivers.  The currently
relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex', 'pdftex',
'xetex'.  The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases for 'dvips'
(and 'xdvi' is monochrome).  Ones that should not be used for new
systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone').  These are stored in files
with a '.def' extension, such as 'pdftex.def'.

   The second kind of options are below.

'demo'
     Instead of an image file, LaTeX puts in a 150 pt by 100 pt
     rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
     '\includegraphics' command).

'draft'
     For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
     printed in a box of the correct size.  In order to determine the
     size, the file must be present.

'final'
     (Default) Override any previous 'draft' option, so that the
     document shows the contents of the graphic files.

'hiderotate'
     Do not show rotated text.  (This allows for the possibility that a
     previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)

'hidescale'
     Do not show scaled text.  (This allows for the possibility that a
     previewer does not have the capability to scale.)

'hiresbb'
     In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways.
     The '%%BoundingBox' lines describe the graphic size using integer
     multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
     inch.  A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
     multiples, such as 1.23, in '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines.  This
     option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.

22.2 Graphics package configuration
===================================

These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
graphic.

   The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
dependent.  In this document we cover Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
those systems are typically configured.  For other situations consult
the documentation in 'grfguide.pdf', or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
distribution's documentation.

22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
----------------------

Synopsis:

     \graphicspath{LIST OF DIR NAMES INSIDE CURLY BRACKETS}

   Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files.  This
allows you to later say something like '\includegraphics{lion.png}'
instead of having to give its path.

   LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
'pix', and then '../pix'.

     \usepackage{graphicx}   % or graphics; put in preamble
       ...
     \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }

   The '\graphicspath' declaration is optional.  If you don't include it
then LaTeX's default is to search all of the places that it usually
looks for a file (it uses LaTeX's '\input@path').  In particular, in
this case one of the places it looks is the current directory.

   Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it
says ''{pix}''.  Do this even if there is only one directory.  Each
directory name must end in a forward slash, '/'.  This is true even on
Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all the
directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
platforms.  If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
quotes, as with '{"my docs/"}'.  Getting one of these rules wrong will
cause LaTeX to report 'Error: File `FILENAME' not found'.

   Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in
the current directory,

     \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
     ...
     \usepackage{lion.png}

   for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the
file name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and
then '../pix/lion.png'.  This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
'\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
will not find it.  It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
'\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}' or
'\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}'.  However, using these
means that the document is not portable.  (You could preserve
portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
parameter 'TEXINPUTS'; see the documentation of your system.)

   You can use '\graphicspath' in the preamble or in the document body.
You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
'\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother'.

   The directories are taken with respect to the base file.  That is,
suppose that you are working on a document based on 'book/book.tex' and
it contains '\include{chapters/chap1}'.  If in 'chap1.tex' you put
'\graphicspath{{plots/}}' then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
'book/chapters/plots', but instead in 'book/plots'.

22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
-----------------------------------

Synopses:

     \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{COMMA-SEPARATED LIST OF FILE EXTENSIONS}

   Declare the filename extensions to try.  This allows you to specify
the order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic
files by giving the filename without the extension, as in
'\includegraphics{functionplot}'.

   In this example, LaTeX will find files in the PNG format before PDF
files.

     \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF}
       ...
     \includegraphics{lion}   % will find lion.png before lion.pdf

   Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
extension list.  For each directory in the graphics path (*note
\graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given.  If
it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
extensions then it reports '! LaTeX Error: File `'lion'' not found'.
Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions.

   Because Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms.  The Windows
platform is not case sensitive.

   You are not required to include '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions' in your
document; the printer driver has a sensible default.  For example, the
most recent 'pdftex.def' has the extension list
''.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2''.

   You can use this command in the preamble or in the document body.
You can use it more than once.  For debugging, show its value with
'\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother'.

22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
-----------------------------

Synopsis:

     \DeclareGraphicsRule{EXTENSION}{TYPE}{SIZE-FILE EXTENSION}{COMMAND}

   Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in EXTENSION.

   This example declares that all files with names have the form
'filename-without-dot.mps' will be treated as output from MetaPost,
meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
input the file.

     \DeclareGraphicsRule{.mps}{mps}{.mps}{}

   This

     \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}

   tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
'filename.2', etc.

   This describes the four arguments.

EXTENSION
     The file extension to which this rule applies.  The extension is
     anything after and including the first dot in the filename.  Use
     the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behaviour for all
     undeclared extensions.

TYPE
     The type of file involved.  This type is a string that must be
     defined in the printer driver.  For instance, files with extensions
     '.ps', '.eps', or '.ps.gz' may all be classed as type 'eps'.  All
     files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
     by the printer driver.  For example, the file types that 'pdftex'
     recognizes are: 'jpg', 'jbig2', 'mps', 'pdf', 'png', 'tif'.

SIZE-FILE EXTENSION
     The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
     graphic, if there is such a file.  It may be the same as EXTENSION
     but it may be different.

     As an example, consider a PostScript graphic.  To make it smaller,
     it might be compressed into a '.ps.gz' file.  Compressed files are
     not easily read by LaTeX so you can put the bounding box
     information in a separate file.  If SIZE-FILE EXTENSION is empty
     then you must specify size information in the arguments of
     '\includegraphics'.

     If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
     'type' then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
     for reading '.eps' files.  (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
     files in a file with a PostScript style '%%BoundingBox' line if no
     other format is available.)

COMMAND
     A command that will be applied to the file.  This is very often
     left blank.  This command must start with a single backward quote.
     Thus, '\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}'
     specifies that any file with the extension '.eps.gz' should be
     treated as an 'eps' file, with the the BoundingBox information
     stored in the file with extension '.eps.bb', and that the command
     'gunzip -c' will run on your platform to decompresses the file.

     Such a command is specific to your platform.  In addition, your TeX
     system must allow you to run external commands; as a security
     measure modern systems restrict running commands unless you
     explicitly allow it.  See the documentation for your TeX
     distribution.

22.3 Commands for graphics
==========================

These are the commands available with the 'graphics' and 'graphicx'
packages.

22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
-------------------------

Synopses for 'graphics' package:

     \includegraphics{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics*[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics*[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}

   Synopses for 'graphicx' package:

     \includegraphics{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
     \includegraphics*[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}

   Include a graphics file.  The starred form '\includegraphics*' will
clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
over-print the surrounding area.

   This

     \usepackage{graphicx}  % in preamble
       ...
     \begin{center}
       \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
     \end{center}

   will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf',
centered and at its nominal size.  You can also give a path to the file,
as with '\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'.  To specify a list of
locations to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.

   If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes, as
with '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.

   The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot.  You can use FILENAME
with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}' and then LaTeX tries a
sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds a file
with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).

   If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can
hide them with curly braces, as in
'\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}'.  Or, if you use the
'graphicx' package then you can use the options 'type' and 'ext'; see
below.  This and other filename issues are also handled with the package
'grffile'.

   This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can move
it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (*note
figure::).

     \begin{figure}
       \centering
       \includegraphics[width=3cm]{lungxray.jpg}
       \caption{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.}  \label{fig:xray}
     \end{figure}

   This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
this point in the document even if makes LaTeX stretch the text or
resort to blank areas on the page.  It will be centered and will have a
caption.

     \usepackage{caption}  % in preamble
       ...
     \begin{center}
       \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
       \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix}  % if you want a caption
     \end{center}

   This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
text, with the two vertically centered.

     \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begingroup
                                     \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\parbox{\wd0}{\box0}\endgroup}
       ...
     \begin{center}
       \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
       \hspace{1em}
       \vcenteredhbox{\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
                        \begin{displaymath}
                          f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
                        \end{displaymath}
                      \end{minipage}}
     \end{center}

   If you use the 'graphics' package then the only options involve the
size of the graphic (but see *note \rotatebox:: and *note \scalebox::).
When one optional argument is present then it is '[URX,URY]' and it
gives the coordinates of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of
TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::).  If the units are omitted they
default to 'bp'.  In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
assumed to be at (0,0).  If two optional arguments are present then the
leading one is '[LLX,LLY]', specifying the coordinates of the image's
lower left.  Thus, '\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}' calls for the
graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches tall and so
its origin is at (0,0).

   The 'graphicx' package gives you many more options.  Specify them in
a key-value form, as here.

     \begin{center}
       \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]{lion}
       \hspace{2em}
       \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
     \end{center}

   The options are read left-to-right.  So the first graphic above is
made one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and
then made one inch wide.  Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square,
the two will end with different widths and heights.

   There are many options.  The primary ones are listed first.

   Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
PostScript BoundingBox described below).  The graphic's printed area may
go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
graphic.

'width'
     The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width.  An
     example is '\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}'.  You can use the
     standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::) and also
     convenient is '\linewidth', or in a two-column document,
     '\columnwidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).  An example is
     that by using the 'calc' package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
     narrow than the width of the text with
     '\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}'.

'height'
     The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height.  You
     can use the standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::), and
     also convenient are '\pageheight' and '\textheight' (*note Page
     layout parameters::).  For instance,
     '\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}' will make the
     graphic be a quarter of the height of the text area.

'totalheight'
     The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
     depth.  This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated.
     For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero
     height but a large depth.

'keepaspectratio'
     If set to 'true', or just specified as with
     '\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}' and you give as
     options both 'width' and 'height' (or 'totalheight'), then LaTeX
     will make the graphic is as large as possible without distortion.
     That is, LaTeX will ensure that neither is the graphic wider than
     'width' nor taller than 'height' (or 'totalheight').

'scale'
     Factor by which to scale the graphic.  Specifying
     '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}' makes the graphic twice its
     nominal size.  This number may be any value; a number between 1
     and 0 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect
     it.

'angle'
     Rotate the picture.  The angle is taken in degrees and
     counterclockwise.  The graphic is rotated about its 'origin'; see
     that option.  For a complete description of how rotated material is
     typeset, *note \rotatebox::.

'origin'
     The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.
     Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
     left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus,
     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
     upside down from the center, while
     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
     picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character 'c'
     gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc', but gives the vertical
     center in 'lc' or 'rc'.)  The default is 'lB'.

     To rotate about an arbitrary point, *note \rotatebox::.

   These are lesser-used options.

'viewport'
     Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show.  Takes four arguments,
     separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
     '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'.  The
     dimensions default to big points, 'bp'.  They are taken relative to
     the origin specified by the bounding box.  See also the 'trim'
     option.

'trim'
     Gives parts of the graphic to not show.  Takes four arguments,
     separated by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with
     '\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}'.
     These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, LaTeX
     will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the
     bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top.  See
     also the 'viewport' option.

'clip'
     If set to 'true', or just specified as with
     '\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}', then the graphic is cropped
     to the bounding box.  You can get this effect by instead using the
     starred form of the command, as '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.

'page'
     Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file.  The default is
     'page=1'.

'pagebox'
     Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
     'mediabox', 'cropbox', 'bleedbox', 'trimbox', or 'artbox'.  PDF
     files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript files have, but
     may specify up to four predefined rectangles.  The MediaBox gives
     the boundaries of the physical medium.  The CropBox is the region
     to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when displayed.
     The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page should
     be clipped in production.  The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
     of the finished page.  The ArtBox is the extent of the page's
     meaningful content.  The driver will set the image size based on
     CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others,
     with a driver-defined order of preference.  MediaBox is always
     present.

'interpolate'
     Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.
     Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as with
     '\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}'.

'quiet'
     Do not write information to the log.  You can set it with
     'quiet=true' or just specified it with
     '\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}',

'draft'
     If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specified it with
     '\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}', then the graphic will not
     appear in the document, possibly saving color printer ink.
     Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the correct size with the
     filename printed in it.

   These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
graphic files, which have a size specified with a line '%%BoundingBox'
that appears in the file.  It has four values, giving the lower x
coordinate, lower y coordinate, upper x coordinate, and upper y
coordinate.  The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX's big
points, 1/72 inch.  For example, if an '.eps' file has the line
'%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80' then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
60/72 inch tall.

'bb'
     Specify the bounding box of the displayed region.  The argument is
     four dimensions separated by spaces, as with '\includegraphics[..,
     bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'.  Usually '\includegraphics' reads
     the BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this
     option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file
     or if you want to change it.

'bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury'
     Set the bounding box.  These four are obsolete, but are retained
     for compatibility with old packages.

'natwidth, natheight'
     An alternative for 'bb'.  Setting
     '\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}' is
     the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.

'hiresbb'
     If set to 'true', or just specified as with
     '\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}', then LaTeX will look for
     '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of '%%BoundingBox' lines.  (The
     'BoundingBox' lines use only natural numbers while the
     'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use units equivalent to
     TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.)  To override a prior setting of
     'true', you can set it to 'false'.

   These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension.  An example
is that '\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}' will read
the file 'lion.xxx' as though it were 'lion.png'.  For more on these,
*note \DeclareGraphicsRule::.

'type'
     Specify the graphics type.

'ext'
     Specify the graphics extension.  Only use this in conjunction with
     the option 'type'.

'read'
     Specify the file extension of the read file.  Only use this in
     conjunction with the option 'type'.

'command'
     Specify a command to be applied to this file.  Only use this in
     conjunction with the option 'type'.

22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
-------------------

Synopsis for 'graphics' package:

     \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}

   Synopses for 'graphicx' package:

     \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
     \rotatebox[KEY-VALUE LIST]{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}

   Put MATERIAL in a box and rotate it ANGLE degrees counterclockwise.

   This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.

     \begin{tabular}{ll}
       \rotatebox{45}{Character} &\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic}   \\
       A                         &AL-FAH  \\
       B                         &BRAH-VOH
     \end{tabular}

   The MATERIAL can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.

       \rotatebox[origin=c]{45}{\includegraphics[width=1in]{lion}}

   To place the rotated material, the first step is that LaTeX sets
MATERIAL in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline.  The
second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point.  The
third step is that LaTeX computes a box to bound the rotated material.
Fourth, LaTeX moves this box horizontally so that the left edge of this
new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box from the first
step (they need not coincide vertically).  This new bounding box, in its
new position, is what LaTeX uses as the box when typesetting this
material.

   If you use the 'graphics' package then the rotation is about the
reference point of the box.  If you use the 'graphicx' package then then
these are the options that can go in the KEY-VALUE LIST, but note that
you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
'x' and 'y' options (*note \includegraphics::).

'origin'
     The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
     Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
     left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
     and 'B' for baseline.  Thus,
     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
     upside down from the center, while
     '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
     picture upside down about its left baseline.  (The character 'c'
     gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives the vertical
     center in 'lc' or 'rc'.)  The default is 'lB'.

'x, y'
     Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with '\rotatebox[x=TeX
     DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}' (*note Units of length::).  These
     give the offset from the box's reference point.

'units'
     This key allows you to change the default of degrees
     counterclockwise.  Setting 'units=-360' changes the direction to
     degrees clockwise and setting 'units=6.283185' changes to radians
     counterclockwise.

22.3.3 '\scalebox'
------------------

Synopses:

     \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}{MATERIAL}
     \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}[VERTICAL FACTOR]{MATERIAL}
     \reflectbox{MATERIAL}

   Scale the MATERIAL.

   This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of
the first text and doubles the size of the second.

     \scalebox{0.5}{DRINK ME} and \scalebox{2.0}{Eat Me}

   If you do not specify the optional VERTICAL FACTOR then it defaults
to the same value as the HORIZONTAL FACTOR.

   You can use this command to resize a graphic, as with
'\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}'.  If you use the 'graphicx'
package then you can accomplish the same thing with optional arguments
to '\includegraphics' (*note \includegraphics::).

   The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection.

22.3.4 '\resizebox'
-------------------

Synopses:

     \resizebox{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
     \resizebox*{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}

   Given a size, such as '3cm', transform MATERIAL to make it that size.
If either HORIZONTAL LENGTH or VERTICAL LENGTH is an exclamation
point '!' then the other argument is used to determine a scale factor
for both directions.

   This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.

     \resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}

   The unstarred form '\resizebox' takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
height while the starred form '\resizebox*' takes it to be height+depth.
For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter inch with
'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This box has both height and
depth.}}'.

   You can use '\depth', '\height', '\totalheight', and '\width' to
refer to the original size of the box.  Thus, make the text two inches
wide but keep the original height with '\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
inches}'.

23 Special insertions
*********************

LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special
meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.

23.1 Reserved characters
========================

LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for
example, the percent sign '%' is for comments) so they are called
"reserved characters" or "special characters".

     # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \

   If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
put a backslash '\' in front of the character.  Thus, '\$1.23' will
produce '$1.23' in your output.

   As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
receiving a tilde accent).  Similarly, to get a get a text body font
circumflex use '\^{}'.  A text body font backslash results from
'\textbackslash{}'.

   To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
'\verb!!', as below.

     \begin{center}
       \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
       \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
     \end{center}

   In that example the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the
lines.

23.2 Upper and lower case
=========================

Synopsis:

     \uppercase{TEXT}
     \lowercase{TEXT}
     \MakeUppercase{TEXT}
     \MakeLowercase{TEXT}

   Change the case of characters.  The TeX primitives commands
'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' only work for American characters.  The
LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' commands also
change characters accessed by commands such as '\ae' or '\aa'.  The
commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have
moving arguments (*note \protect::).

   These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
a command within TEXT.  But they do change the case of every other Latin
letter inside the argument TEXT.  Thus, '\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$'}
produces 'LET Y=F(X)'.  Another example is that the name of an
environment will be changed, so that '\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
\end{tabular}}' will produce an error because the first half is changed
to '\begin{TABULAR}'.

   LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but will
cause problems when using other alphabets.

   To change the case of text that results from a macro inside TEXT you
need to do expansion.  Here the '\Schoolname' produces 'COLLEGE OF
MATHEMATICS'.

     \newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
     \newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
                                \expandafter{\schoolname}}

   The 'textcase' package brings some of the missing feature of the
standard LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowerCase'.

   To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
'mfirstuc'.

23.3 Symbols by font position
=============================

You can access any character of the current font using its number with
the '\symbol' command.  For example, the visible space character used in
the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
'\symbol{32}'.

   You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the previous example
could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.

23.4 Text symbols
=================

LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
running text.  Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package.

'\copyright'
'\textcopyright'
     The copyright symbol, (C).

'\dag'
     The dagger symbol (in text).

'\ddag'
     The double dagger symbol (in text).

'\LaTeX'
     The LaTeX logo.

'\LaTeXe'
     The LaTeX2e logo.

'\guillemotleft (<<)'
'\guillemotright (>>)'
'\guilsinglleft (<)'
'\guilsinglright (>)'
     Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
     <<, >>, <, >.

'\ldots'
'\dots'
'\textellipsis'
     An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '...'.  '\ldots' and
     '\dots' also work in math mode.

'\lq'
     Left (opening) quote: '.

'\P'
'\textparagraph'
     Paragraph sign (pilcrow): U+00B6.

'\pounds'
'\textsterling'
     English pounds sterling: #.

'\quotedblbase (,,)'
'\quotesinglbase (,)'
     Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: ,, and ,.

'\rq'
     Right (closing) quote: '.

'\S'
     \itemx \textsection Section sign: U+00A7.

'\TeX'
     The TeX logo.

'\textasciicircum'
     ASCII circumflex: ^.

'\textasciitilde'
     ASCII tilde: ~.

'\textasteriskcentered'
     Centered asterisk: *.

'\textbackslash'
     Backslash: \.

'\textbar'
     Vertical bar: |.

'\textbardbl'
     Double vertical bar.

'\textbigcircle'
     Big circle symbol.

'\textbraceleft'
     Left brace: {.

'\textbraceright'
     Right brace: }.

'\textbullet'
     Bullet: *.

'\textcircled{LETTER}'
     LETTER in a circle, as in (R).

'\textcompwordmark'
'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
'\textascendercompwordmark'
     Composite word mark (invisible).  The '\textcapital...' form has
     the cap height of the font, while the '\textascender...' form has
     the ascender height.

'\textdagger'
     Dagger: \dag.

'\textdaggerdbl'
     Double dagger: \ddag.

'\textdollar (or '\$')'
     Dollar sign: $.

'\textemdash (or '---')'
     Em-dash: -- (for punctuation).

'\textendash (or '--')'
     En-dash: - (for ranges).

'\texteuro'
     The Euro symbol: Euro.

'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
     Upside down exclamation point: !.

'\textgreater'
     Greater than: >.

'\textless'
     Less than: <.

'\textleftarrow'
     Left arrow.

'\textordfeminine'
'\textordmasculine'
     Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o.

'\textperiodcentered'
     Centered period: U+00B7.

'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
     Upside down question mark: ?.

'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
     Double left quote: ".

'\textquotedblright (or '''')'
     Double right quote: ".

'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
     Single left quote: '.

'\textquoteright (or ''')'
     Single right quote: '.

'\textquotesingle'
     Straight single quote.  (From TS1 encoding.)

'\textquotestraightbase'
'\textquotestraightdblbase'
     Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.

'\textregistered'
     Registered symbol: (R).

'\textrightarrow'
     Right arrow.

'\textthreequartersemdash'
     "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.

'\texttrademark'
     Trademark symbol: U+2122.

'\texttwelveudash'
     "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.

'\textunderscore'
     Underscore: _.

'\textvisiblespace'
     Visible space symbol.

23.5 Accents
============

LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
through the 'babel' package and related support.  This section does not
attempt to cover all that support.  It merely lists the core LaTeX
commands for creating accented characters.

   The '\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with
capital letters.  These are not available with OT1.

'\"'
'\capitaldieresis'
     Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o".

'\''
'\capitalacute'
     Produces an acute accent, as in o'.  In the 'tabbing' environment,
     pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note
     tabbing::).

'\.'
     Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o..

'\='
'\capitalmacron'
     Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=.

'\^'
'\capitalcircumflex'
     Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^.

'\`'
'\capitalgrave'
     Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`.  In the
     'tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin
     (*note tabbing::).

'\~'
'\capitaltilde'
     Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.

'\b'
     Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.  See also
     '\underbar' hereinafter.

'\c'
'\capitalcedilla'
     Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c,.

'\d'
'\capitaldotaccent'
     Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o.

'\H'
'\capitalhungarumlaut'
     Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in
     o''.

'\i'
     Produces a dotless i, as in 'i'.

'\j'
     Produces a dotless j, as in 'j'.

'\k'
'\capitalogonek'
     Produces a letter with ogonek, as in 'o;'.  Not available in the
     OT1 encoding.

'\r'
'\capitalring'
     Produces a ring accent, as in 'o*'.

'\t'
'\capitaltie'
'\newtie'
'\capitalnewtie'
     Produces a tie-after accent, as in 'oo['.  The '\newtie' form is
     centered in its box.

'\u'
'\capitalbreve'
     Produces a breve accent, as in 'o('.

'\underbar'
     Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
     The argument is always processed in horizontal mode.  The bar is
     always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
     descenders.  See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.  See
     also '\b' above.

'\v'
'\capitalcaron'
     Produces a ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent, as in 'o<'.

23.6 Additional Latin letters
=============================

Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters (beyond A-Z)
extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
English.

'\aa'
'\AA'
     aa and AA.

'\ae'
'\AE'
     ae and AE.

'\dh'
'\DH'
     Icelandic letter eth: d and D. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
     need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
     such as T1.

'\dj'
'\DJ'
     Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
     Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the 'fontenc' package to
     select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.

'\ij'
'\IJ'
     ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).

'\l'
'\L'
     /l and /L.

'\ng'
'\NG'
     Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.

'\o'
'\O'
     /o and /O.

'\oe'
'\OE'
     oe and OE.

'\ss'
'\SS'
     ss and SS.

'\th'
'\TH'
     Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH. Not available with OT1 encoding,
     you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
     encoding, such as T1.

23.7 '\rule'
============

Synopsis:

     \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}

   The '\rule' command produces "rules", that is, lines or rectangles.
The arguments are:

RAISE
     How high to raise the rule (optional).

WIDTH
     The length of the rule (mandatory).

THICKNESS
     The thickness of the rule (mandatory).

23.8 '\today'
=============

The '\today' command produces today's date, in the format 'MONTH DD,
YYYY'; for example, 'July 4, 1976'.  It uses the predefined counters
'\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day \month \year::) to do this.
It is not updated as the program runs.

   Multilingual packages like 'babel' or classes like 'lettre', among
others, will localize '\today'.  For example, the following will output
'4 juillet 1976':

     \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
     \documentclass{minimal}
     \usepackage[french]{babel}
     \begin{document}
     \today
     \end{document}

   The 'datetime' package, among others, can produce a wide variety of
other date formats.

24 Splitting the input
**********************

A large document requires a lot of input.  Rather than putting the whole
input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
several smaller ones.  Regardless of how many separate files you use,
there is one that is the "root file"; it is the one whose name you type
when you run LaTeX.

   *Note filecontents::, for an environment that allows bundling an
external file to be created with the main document.

24.1 '\include'
===============

Synopsis:

     \include{FILE}

   If no '\includeonly' command is present, the '\include' command
executes '\clearpage' to start a new page (*note \clearpage::), then
reads FILE, then does another '\clearpage'.

   Given an '\includeonly' command, the '\include' actions are only run
if FILE is listed as an argument to '\includeonly'.  See *note
\includeonly::.

   The '\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
read by another '\include' command.

24.2 '\includeonly'
===================

Synopsis:

     \includeonly{FILE1,FILE2,...}

   The '\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by
subsequent '\include' commands.  The list of filenames is
comma-separated.  Each element FILE1, FILE2, ... must exactly match a
filename specified in a '\include' command for the selection to be
effective.

   This command can only appear in the preamble.

24.3 '\input'
=============

Synopsis:

     \input{FILE}

   The '\input' command causes the specified FILE to be read and
processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at
that point.

   If FILE does not end in '.tex' (e.g., 'foo' or 'foo.bar'), it is
first tried with that extension ('foo.tex' or 'foo.bar.tex').  If that
is not found, the original FILE is tried ('foo' or 'foo.bar').

25 Front/back matter
********************

25.1 Tables of contents
=======================

A table of contents is produced with the '\tableofcontents' command.
You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
LaTeX does the rest for you.  A previous run must have generated a
'.toc' file.

   The '\tableofcontents' command produces a heading, but it does not
automatically start a new page.  If you want a new page after the table
of contents, write a '\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents'
command.

   The analogous commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a
list of figures and a list of tables (from '.lof' and '.lot' files),
respectively.  Everything works exactly the same as for the table of
contents.

   The command '\nofiles' overrides these commands, and _prevents_ any
of these lists from being generated.

25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
-------------------------

Synopsis:

     \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}

   The '\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list or
table where:

EXT
     The filename extension of the file on which information is to be
     written, typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list
     of figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).

UNIT
     The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
     following, matching the value of the EXT argument:

     'toc'
          The name of the sectional unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section',
          'subsection', 'subsubsection'.
     'lof'
          For the list of figures: 'figure'.
     'lot'
          For the list of tables: 'table'.

TEXT
     The text of the entry.

   What is written to the '.EXT' file is the command
'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
counter 'UNIT'.

25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
-----------------------

The '\addtocontents'{EXT}{TEXT} command adds text (or formatting
commands) directly to the '.EXT' file that generates the table of
contents or lists of figures or tables.

EXT
     The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
     typically one of: 'toc' (table of contents), 'lof' (list of
     figures), or 'lot' (list of tables).

TEXT
     The text to be written.

25.2 Glossaries
===============

The command '\makeglossary' enables creating glossaries.

   The command '\glossary{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an
auxiliary file with the '.glo' extension.

   Specifically, what gets written is the command
'\glossaryentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current '\thepage'
value.

   The 'glossary' package on CTAN provides support for fancier
glossaries.

25.3 Indexes
============

The command '\makeindex' enables creating indexes.  Put this in the
preamble.

   The command '\index{TEXT}' writes an index entry for TEXT to an
auxiliary file named with the '.idx' extension.

   Specifically, what gets written is the command
'\indexentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current '\thepage'
value.

   To generate a index entry for 'bar' that says 'See foo', use a
vertical bar: '\index{bar|see{foo}}'.  Use 'seealso' instead of 'see' to
make a 'See also' entry.

   The text 'See' is defined by the macro '\seename', and 'See also' by
the macro '\alsoname'.  These can be redefined for other languages.

   The generated '.idx' file is then sorted with an external command,
usually either 'makeindex' (<http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex>)
or (the multi-lingual) 'xindy' (<http://xindy.sourceforge.net>).  This
results in a '.ind' file, which can then be read to typeset the index.

   The index is usually generated with the '\printindex' command.  This
is defined in the 'makeidx' package, so '\usepackage{makeidx}' needs to
be in the preamble.

   The rubber length '\indexspace' is inserted before each new letter in
the printed index; its default value is '10pt plus5pt minus3pt'.

   The 'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the
margin on the page where the entry appears.  This can help in preparing
the index.

   The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes.  See also the TeX
FAQ entry on this topic,
<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.

26 Letters
**********

Synopsis:

     \documentclass{letter}
     \address{SENDER ADDRESS}
     \signature{SENDER NAME}
     \begin{document}
     \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
     \opening{SALUTATION}
       LETTER BODY
     \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
     \end{letter}
     ...  more letters ...
     \end{document}

   Produce one or more letters.

   Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
backslash ('\\').  For example, you might have:

      \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\
           2345 Princess St. \\
           Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
        ...
      \end{letter}

   The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
and the footnote number to 1 also.

   The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble.  As
with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
separated by a double backslash ('\\').  LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.

   Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'.  The LETTER BODY text is
ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from enumerated lists to
displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
sense in a letter are turned off.  Each 'letter' environment body
typically ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.

   Additional material may come after the '\closing'.  You can say who
is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
the Boss's Boss}'.  There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
enclosures.  And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.

   LaTeX's default is to indent the signature and the '\closing' above
it by a length of '\longindentation'.  By default this is
'0.5\textwidth'.  To make them flush left, put
'\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your preamble.

   To set a fixed date use something like
'\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}'.  If put in your preamble then it
will apply to all the letters.

   This example shows only one 'letter' environment.  The three lines
marked as optional are typically omitted.

     \documentclass{letter}
     \address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
     \signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
     % optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
     % optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
     \begin{document}
     \begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
     \opening{Sir:}
     % optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
     I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
     \closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
     \end{letter}
     \end{document}

   These commands are used with the 'letter' class.

26.1 '\address'
===============

Synopsis:

     \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}

   Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
envelope.  Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
backslash '\\'.

   Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
put in the preamble.  However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
individual 'letter' environment.

   This command is optional: without the '\address' declaration the
letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
pre-printed letterhead paper.  (*Note Overview::, for details on your
local implementation.)  With the '\address' declaration, it is formatted
as a personal letter.

   Here is an example.

     \address{Stephen Maturin \\
              The Grapes of the Savoy}

26.2 '\cc'
==========

Synopsis:

     \cc{FIRST NAME \\
          ... }

   Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
This command is optional.  If it appears then typically it comes after
'\closing'.  Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\', as
in:

     \cc{President \\
         Vice President}

26.3 '\closing'
===============

Synopsis:

     \closing{TEXT}

   Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature,
there is a '\closing' (although this command is optional).  For example,

     \closing{Regards,}

26.4 '\encl'
============

Synopsis:

     \encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
            ... }

   Produce a list of things included with the letter.  This command is
optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.

     \encl{License \\
            Passport }

26.5 '\location'
================

Synopsis:

     \location{TEXT}

   The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the each page.  It only
appears if the page style is 'firstpage'.

26.6 '\makelabels'
==================

Synopsis:

     \makelabels

   Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one
for each letter.  This sheet will be output before the letters, with the
idea that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels.  This command
goes in the preamble.

   Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' in the preamble.  The command
'\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of the
page onto which the labels are printed.  The command '\mlabel{SENDER
ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or one, if you
choose to ignore the SENDER ADDRESS).  The SENDER ADDRESS is the value
returned by the macro '\returnaddress' while RECIPIENT ADDRESS is the
value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment.  By default
'\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the SENDER ADDRESS.

26.7 '\name'
============

Synopsis:

     \name{NAME}

   Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
return address.

26.8 '\opening'
===============

Synopsis:

     \opening{TEXT}

   This command is required.  It starts a letter, following the
'\begin{letter}{...}'.  The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
starts your letter.  For instance:

     \opening{Dear John:}

26.9 '\ps'
==========

Synopsis:

     \ps{TEXT}

   Add a postscript.  This command is optional and usually is used after
'\closing'.

     \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}

26.10 '\signature'
==================

Synopsis:

     \signature{FIRST LINE \\
                 ... }

   The sender's name.  This command is optional, although its inclusion
is usual.

   The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written signature.
Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.  For example:

     \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
                White House}

   LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times 0.7em.

   This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
in the document.  To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.

   You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
'\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ My
name}' (this requires writing '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble).

26.11 '\telephone'
==================

Synopsis:

     \telephone{NUMBER}

   The sender's telephone number.  This is typically in the preamble,
where it applies to all letters.  This only appears if the 'firstpage'
pagestyle is selected.  If so, it appears on the lower right of the
page.

27 Terminal input/output
************************

27.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
========================

Synopsis:

     \typein[\CMD]{MSG}

   '\typein' prints MSG on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and
wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return.  If the
optional '\CMD' argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if
it had been included in the input file in place of the '\typein'
command.  If the '\CMD' argument is present, it must be a command name.
This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.

27.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
====================

Synopsis:

     \typeout{MSG}

   Prints 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.  Commands in
'msg' that are defined with '\newcommand' or '\renewcommand' (among
others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed.

   LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'.  A '\space'
command in 'msg' causes a single space to be printed, independent of
surrounding spaces.  A '^^J' in 'msg' prints a newline.

28 Command line
***************

The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
uses '.tex' as a default file extension.  If you omit the input file
entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal.  You can also specify
arbitrary LaTeX input by starting with a backslash.  For example, this
processes 'foo.tex' without pausing after every error:

     latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'

   With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can
also be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with '-' or '--'.  For
a list of those options, try 'latex --help'.

   If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a '*'
prompt, it is waiting for input.  You can type '\stop' (and return) and
it will prematurely end the document.

   *Note TeX engines::, for other system commands invoking LaTeX.

Appendix A Document templates
*****************************

Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
be useful.  Additional template resources are listed at
<http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates>.

A.1 'beamer' template
=====================

The 'beamer' class creates presentation slides.  It has a vast array of
features, but here is a basic template:

\documentclass{beamer}

\title{Beamer Class template}
\author{Alex Author}
\date{July 31, 2007}

\begin{document}

\maketitle

% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
\begin{frame}[fragile]
 \frametitle{First Slide}

\begin{verbatim}
  This is \verbatim!
\end{verbatim}

\end{frame}

\end{document}

   One web resource for this:
<http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/>.

A.2 'book' template
===================

\documentclass{book}
\title{Book Class Template}
\author{Alex Author}

\begin{document}
\maketitle

\chapter{First}
Some text.

\chapter{Second}
Some other text.

\section{A subtopic}
The end.
\end{document}

A.3 'tugboat' template
======================

'TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.

\documentclass{ltugboat}

\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
\else
\usepackage{url}
\fi

%%% Start of metadata %%%

\title{Example \TUB\ article}

% repeat info for each author.
\author{First Last}
\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}

%%% End of metadata %%%

\begin{document}

\maketitle

\begin{abstract}
This is an example article for \TUB{}.
Please write an abstract.
\end{abstract}

\section{Introduction}

This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.

We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
output).  Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.

The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
\mf \MFB
\plain \POBox \PS
\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
\TUB \TUG \tug
\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE

\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph

\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred}  % please use!
\cs{fred}   -> \fred
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
\nth{n}     -> 1st, 2nd, ...
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}

For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.

This file is just a template.  The \TUB\ style documentation is the
\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}.  (For
\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)

Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.

\bibliographystyle{plain}  % we recommend the plain bibliography style
\nocite{book-minimal}      % just making the bibliography non-empty
\bibliography{xampl}       % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX

\makesignature
\end{document}

Concept Index
*************

* Menu:

* * prompt:                              Command line.       (line 9743)
* *-form of environment commands:        \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5102)
* *-form of sectioning commands:         Sectioning.         (line 1997)
* *-form, defining new commands:         \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4942)
* .glo file:                             Glossaries.         (line 9386)
* .idx file:                             Indexes.            (line 9402)
* .ind file:                             Indexes.            (line 9416)
* 'see' and 'see also' index entries:    Indexes.            (line 9409)
* abstracts:                             abstract.           (line 2357)
* accents:                               Accents.            (line 9057)
* accents, mathematical:                 Math accents.       (line 6974)
* accessing any character of a font:     Symbols by font position.
                                                             (line 8865)
* acute accent:                          Accents.            (line 9071)
* acute accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6979)
* additional packages, loading:          Additional packages.
                                                             (line  802)
* ae ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9163)
* algorithm2e package:                   tabbing.            (line 3906)
* align environment, from amsmath:       eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* aligning equations:                    eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* alignment via tabbing:                 tabbing.            (line 3768)
* amsmath package:                       array.              (line 2437)
* amsmath package <1>:                   displaymath.        (line 2613)
* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray:   eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* appendix, creating:                    Sectioning.         (line 2003)
* aring:                                 Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9159)
* arrays, math:                          array.              (line 2403)
* arrow, left, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 9002)
* arrow, right, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 9037)
* ascender height:                       Text symbols.       (line 8970)
* ASCII circumflex, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 8935)
* ASCII tilde, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8938)
* asterisk, centered, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8941)
* at clause, in font definitions:        \newfont.           (line 5330)
* author, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.         (line 7235)
* auxiliary file:                        Output files.       (line  416)
* babel package:                         thebibliography.    (line 4302)
* babel package <1>:                     Accents.            (line 9057)
* background, colored:                   Colored pages.      (line 8035)
* backslash, in text:                    Text symbols.       (line 8944)
* bar, double vertical, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 8950)
* bar, vertical, in text:                Text symbols.       (line 8947)
* bar-over accent:                       Accents.            (line 9080)
* bar-over accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 6982)
* bar-under accent:                      Accents.            (line 9097)
* basics of LaTeX:                       Overview.           (line  335)
* beamer template and class:             beamer template.    (line 9759)
* beginning of document hook:            \AtBeginDocument.   (line 2645)
* bibliography format, open:             Document class options.
                                                             (line  764)
* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX.      (line 4358)
* bibliography, creating (manually):     thebibliography.    (line 4279)
* bibTeX, using:                         Using BibTeX.       (line 4358)
* big circle symbols, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8953)
* Big point:                             Units of length.    (line 5704)
* black boxes, omitting:                 Document class options.
                                                             (line  750)
* bold font:                             Font styles.        (line 1289)
* bold math:                             Font styles.        (line 1348)
* bold typewriter, avoiding:             description.        (line 2572)
* box, allocating new:                   \newsavebox.        (line 5079)
* box, colored:                          Colored boxes.      (line 7998)
* boxes:                                 Boxes.              (line 7640)
* brace, left, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8956)
* brace, right, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8959)
* breaking lines:                        Line breaking.      (line 4501)
* breaking pages:                        Page breaking.      (line 4644)
* breve accent:                          Accents.            (line 9137)
* breve accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6985)
* bug reporting:                         About this document.
                                                             (line  306)
* bullet symbol:                         Math symbols.       (line 6079)
* bullet, in text:                       Text symbols.       (line 8962)
* bulleted lists:                        itemize.            (line 2979)
* calligraphic letters for math:         Font styles.        (line 1292)
* cap height:                            Text symbols.       (line 8970)
* caron accent:                          Accents.            (line 9148)
* catcode:                               \makeatletter and \makeatother.
                                                             (line  572)
* category code, character:              \makeatletter and \makeatother.
                                                             (line  572)
* cc list, in letters:                   \cc.                (line 9546)
* cedilla accent:                        Accents.            (line 9102)
* centered asterisk, in text:            Text symbols.       (line 8941)
* centered equations:                    Document class options.
                                                             (line  754)
* centered period, in text:              Text symbols.       (line 9009)
* centering text, declaration for:       \centering.         (line 2512)
* centering text, environment for:       center.             (line 2469)
* Centimeter:                            Units of length.    (line 5708)
* character category code:               \makeatletter and \makeatother.
                                                             (line  572)
* characters, accented:                  Accents.            (line 9057)
* characters, case:                      Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8820)
* characters, non-English:               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* characters, reserved:                  Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8786)
* characters, special:                   Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8786)
* check accent:                          Accents.            (line 9148)
* check accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6988)
* Cicero:                                Units of length.    (line 5717)
* circle symbol, big, in text:           Text symbols.       (line 8953)
* circled letter, in text:               Text symbols.       (line 8965)
* circumflex accent:                     Accents.            (line 9084)
* circumflex accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 7000)
* circumflex, ASCII, in text:            Text symbols.       (line 8935)
* citation key:                          \bibitem.           (line 4320)
* class and package commands:            Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  885)
* class and package difference:          Class and package construction.
                                                             (line  827)
* class and package structure:           Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* class file example:                    Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  871)
* class file layout:                     Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* class options:                         Document class options.
                                                             (line  703)
* class options <1>:                     Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* class options <2>:                     Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* classes of documents:                  Document classes.   (line  669)
* closing letters:                       \closing.           (line 9562)
* closing quote:                         Text symbols.       (line 8926)
* code, typesetting:                     verbatim.           (line 4447)
* color:                                 Color.              (line 7807)
* color <1>:                             Define colors.      (line 7912)
* color <2>:                             Colored text.       (line 7932)
* color <3>:                             Colored boxes.      (line 7998)
* color <4>:                             Colored pages.      (line 8035)
* color models:                          Color models.       (line 7860)
* color package commands:                Commands for color. (line 7907)
* color package options:                 Color package options.
                                                             (line 7822)
* color, define:                         Define colors.      (line 7912)
* colored boxes:                         Colored boxes.      (line 7998)
* colored page:                          Colored pages.      (line 8035)
* colored text:                          Colored text.       (line 7932)
* command line:                          Command line.       (line 9731)
* command syntax:                        LaTeX command syntax.
                                                             (line  486)
* commands, class and package:           Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  885)
* commands, defining new ones:           \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4934)
* commands, defining new ones <1>:       \providecommand.    (line 5025)
* commands, document class:              Class and package construction.
                                                             (line  818)
* commands, graphics package:            Commands for graphics.
                                                             (line 8343)
* commands, ignore spaces:               \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
                                                             (line 5400)
* commands, redefining:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4934)
* commands, star-variants:               \@ifstar.           (line  609)
* composite word mark, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8970)
* computer programs, typesetting:        verbatim.           (line 4447)
* configuration, graphics package:       Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* contents file:                         Output files.       (line  426)
* copyright symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 8883)
* counters, a list of:                   Counters.           (line 5473)
* counters, defining new:                \newcounter.        (line 5040)
* counters, getting value of:            \value.             (line 5573)
* counters, printing:                    \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5499)
* counters, setting:                     \setcounter.        (line 5602)
* creating pictures:                     picture.            (line 3460)
* creating tables:                       table.              (line 3915)
* credit footnote:                       \maketitle.         (line 7245)
* cross references:                      Cross references.   (line 2215)
* cross references, resolving:           Output files.       (line  416)
* cross referencing with page number:    \pageref.           (line 2297)
* cross referencing, symbolic:           \ref.               (line 2318)
* currency, dollar:                      Text symbols.       (line 8981)
* currency, euro:                        Text symbols.       (line 8990)
* dagger, double, in text:               Text symbols.       (line 8978)
* dagger, in text:                       Text symbols.       (line 8886)
* dagger, in text <1>:                   Text symbols.       (line 8975)
* date, for titlepage:                   \maketitle.         (line 7241)
* date, today's:                         \today.             (line 9229)
* datetime package:                      \today.             (line 9245)
* define color:                          Define colors.      (line 7912)
* defining a new command:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4934)
* defining a new command <1>:            \providecommand.    (line 5025)
* defining new environments:             \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5094)
* defining new fonts:                    \newfont.           (line 5313)
* defining new theorems:                 \newtheorem.        (line 5201)
* definitions:                           Definitions.        (line 4929)
* description lists, creating:           description.        (line 2544)
* design size, in font definitions:      \newfont.           (line 5330)
* Didot point:                           Units of length.    (line 5714)
* dieresis accent:                       Accents.            (line 9067)
* difference between class and package:  Class and package construction.
                                                             (line  827)
* discretionary hyphenation:             \discretionary.     (line 4586)
* discretionary multiplication:          Math miscellany.    (line 7070)
* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* document class commands:               Class and package construction.
                                                             (line  818)
* document class options:                Document class options.
                                                             (line  703)
* document class, defined:               Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  369)
* document classes:                      Document classes.   (line  669)
* document templates:                    Document templates. (line 9752)
* dollar sign:                           Text symbols.       (line 8981)
* dot accent:                            Accents.            (line 9076)
* dot over accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 6994)
* dot-over accent:                       Accents.            (line 9076)
* dot-under accent:                      Accents.            (line 9106)
* dotless i:                             Accents.            (line 9114)
* dotless i, math:                       Math accents.       (line 7003)
* dotless j:                             Accents.            (line 9117)
* dotless j, math:                       Math accents.       (line 7006)
* double angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* double dagger, in text:                Text symbols.       (line 8889)
* double dagger, in text <1>:            Text symbols.       (line 8978)
* double dot accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 6991)
* double guillemets:                     Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* double left quote:                     Text symbols.       (line 9015)
* double low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.       (line 8923)
* double quote, straight base:           Text symbols.       (line 9031)
* double right quote:                    Text symbols.       (line 9018)
* double spacing:                        Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1504)
* double vertical bar, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8950)
* e-dash:                                Text symbols.       (line 8987)
* e-TeX:                                 TeX engines.        (line  441)
* ellipsis:                              Text symbols.       (line 8907)
* em:                                    Units of length.    (line 5722)
* em-dash:                               Text symbols.       (line 8984)
* em-dash, three-quarters:               Text symbols.       (line 9040)
* em-dash, two-thirds:                   Text symbols.       (line 9046)
* emphasis:                              Font styles.        (line 1277)
* enclosure list:                        \encl.              (line 9574)
* end of document hook:                  \AtEndDocument.     (line 2661)
* ending and starting:                   Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  361)
* engines, TeX:                          TeX engines.        (line  435)
* enlarge current page:                  \enlargethispage.   (line 4673)
* enumitem package:                      list.               (line 3085)
* environment:                           Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  377)
* environment, theorem-like:             \newtheorem.        (line 5201)
* environments:                          Environments.       (line 2340)
* environments, defining:                \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5094)
* EPS files:                             Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* EPS files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* equation number, cross referencing:    \ref.               (line 2318)
* equation numbers, left vs. right:      Document class options.
                                                             (line  760)
* equation numbers, omitting:            eqnarray.           (line 2779)
* equations, aligning:                   eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* equations, environment for:            equation.           (line 2800)
* equations, flush left vs. centered:    Document class options.
                                                             (line  754)
* es-zet German letter:                  Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9199)
* eth, Icelandic letter:                 Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9167)
* etoolbox package:                      Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  989)
* euro symbol:                           Text symbols.       (line 8990)
* ex:                                    Units of length.    (line 5722)
* exclamation point, upside-down:        Text symbols.       (line 8993)
* exponent:                              Subscripts & superscripts.
                                                             (line 5938)
* extended Latin:                        Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* external files, writing:               filecontents.       (line 2876)
* families, of fonts:                    Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1407)
* fancyvrb package:                      tabbing.            (line 3906)
* feminine ordinal symbol:               Text symbols.       (line 9006)
* figure number, cross referencing:      \ref.               (line 2318)
* figures, footnotes in:                 minipage.           (line 3447)
* figures, inserting:                    figure.             (line 2823)
* file, root:                            Splitting the input.
                                                             (line 9254)
* fixed-width font:                      Font styles.        (line 1310)
* flafter package:                       Floats.             (line 1898)
* float package:                         Floats.             (line 1868)
* float page:                            Floats.             (line 1874)
* flush left equations:                  Document class options.
                                                             (line  754)
* flushing floats and starting a page:   \clearpage.         (line 4660)
* font catalogue:                        Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1407)
* font commands, low-level:              Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1392)
* font size:                             Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1487)
* font sizes:                            Font sizes.         (line 1366)
* font styles:                           Font styles.        (line 1224)
* font symbols, by number:               Symbols by font position.
                                                             (line 8865)
* fonts:                                 Fonts.              (line 1218)
* fonts, new commands for:               \newfont.           (line 5313)
* footer style:                          \pagestyle.         (line 7280)
* footer, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* footmisc package:                      Footnotes in section headings.
                                                             (line 4857)
* footnote number, cross referencing:    \ref.               (line 2318)
* footnote parameters:                   Footnote parameters.
                                                             (line 4913)
* footnotes in figures:                  minipage.           (line 3447)
* footnotes, creating:                   Footnotes.          (line 4706)
* Footnotes, in a minipage:              \footnote.          (line 4753)
* Footnotes, in a table:                 Footnotes in a table.
                                                             (line 4807)
* footnotes, in section headings:        Footnotes in section headings.
                                                             (line 4853)
* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote.          (line 4741)
* formulas, environment for:             equation.           (line 2800)
* formulas, math:                        Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* forward reference:                     Cross references.   (line 2231)
* forward references, resolving:         Output files.       (line  416)
* fragile commands:                      \protect.           (line 5348)
* French quotation marks:                Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* functions, math:                       Math functions.     (line 6866)
* geometry package:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  737)
* geometry package <1>:                  Document class options.
                                                             (line  741)
* global options:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  703)
* global options <1>:                    Additional packages.
                                                             (line  811)
* glossaries:                            Glossaries.         (line 9384)
* glossary package:                      Glossaries.         (line 9393)
* glue register, plain TeX:              \newlength.         (line 5064)
* graphics:                              Graphics.           (line 8056)
* graphics <1>:                          Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* graphics <2>:                          \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* graphics package:                      Graphics.           (line 8056)
* graphics package <1>:                  Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* graphics package <2>:                  \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* graphics package commands:             Commands for graphics.
                                                             (line 8343)
* graphics package options:              Graphics package options.
                                                             (line 8093)
* graphics packages:                     \line.              (line 3623)
* graphics, resizing:                    \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* graphics, resizing <1>:                \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* graphics, scaling:                     \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* graphics, scaling <1>:                 \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* grave accent:                          Accents.            (line 9088)
* grave accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 6997)
* greater than symbol, in text:          Text symbols.       (line 8996)
* greek letters:                         Math symbols.       (line 5971)
* group, and environments:               Environments.       (line 2352)
* ha'c<ek accent, math:                  Math accents.       (line 6988)
* hacek accent:                          Accents.            (line 9148)
* hat accent:                            Accents.            (line 9084)
* hat accent, math:                      Math accents.       (line 7000)
* header style:                          \pagestyle.         (line 7280)
* header, parameters for:                Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* hello, world:                          Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  361)
* here, putting floats:                  Floats.             (line 1868)
* hungarian umlaut accent:               Accents.            (line 9110)
* hyphenation, defining:                 \hyphenation.       (line 4611)
* hyphenation, discretionary:            \discretionary.     (line 4586)
* hyphenation, forcing:                  \- (hyphenation).   (line 4574)
* hyphenation, preventing:               \mbox.              (line 7646)
* Icelandic eth:                         Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9167)
* Icelandic thorn:                       Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9203)
* ij letter, Dutch:                      Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9179)
* implementations of TeX:                TeX engines.        (line  435)
* importing graphics:                    \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* in-line formulas:                      math.               (line 3420)
* including graphics:                    \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* indent, forcing:                       \indent.            (line 5819)
* indent, suppressing:                   \noindent.          (line 5830)
* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage.          (line 3443)
* index entries, 'see' and 'see also':   Indexes.            (line 9409)
* indexes:                               Indexes.            (line 9399)
* infinite horizontal stretch:           \hfill.             (line 7355)
* infinite vertical stretch:             \vfill.             (line 7584)
* input file:                            Splitting the input.
                                                             (line 9251)
* input/output, to terminal:             Terminal input/output.
                                                             (line 9698)
* inserting figures:                     figure.             (line 2823)
* insertions of special characters:      Special insertions. (line 8780)
* italic correction:                     \/.                 (line 7493)
* italic font:                           Font styles.        (line 1295)
* JPEG files:                            Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* JPEG files <1>:                        \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* JPG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* JPG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* justification, ragged left:            \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
* justification, ragged right:           \raggedright.       (line 2940)
* Knuth, Donald E.:                      Overview.           (line  335)
* label:                                 Cross references.   (line 2218)
* labelled lists, creating:              description.        (line 2544)
* Lamport TeX:                           Overview.           (line  353)
* Lamport, Leslie:                       Overview.           (line  335)
* landscape orientation:                 Document class options.
                                                             (line  757)
* LaTeX logo:                            Text symbols.       (line 8892)
* LaTeX overview:                        Overview.           (line  335)
* LaTeX Project team:                    About this document.
                                                             (line  302)
* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e:                     About this document.
                                                             (line  298)
* LaTeX2e logo:                          Text symbols.       (line 8895)
* Latin letters, additional:             Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* layout commands:                       Layout.             (line 1534)
* layout, page parameters for:           Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* left angle quotation marks:            Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* left arrow, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 9002)
* left brace, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 8956)
* left quote:                            Text symbols.       (line 8911)
* left quote, double:                    Text symbols.       (line 9015)
* left quote, single:                    Text symbols.       (line 9021)
* left-hand equation numbers:            Document class options.
                                                             (line  760)
* left-justifying text:                  \raggedright.       (line 2940)
* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft.          (line 2927)
* left-to-right mode:                    Modes.              (line 7153)
* length command:                        \setlength.         (line 5744)
* lengths, adding to:                    \addtolength.       (line 5752)
* lengths, allocating new:               \newlength.         (line 5064)
* lengths, defining and using:           Lengths.            (line 5662)
* lengths, predefined:                   Predefined lengths. (line 5792)
* lengths, setting:                      \setlength.         (line 5740)
* less than symbol, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 8999)
* letters, accented:                     Accents.            (line 9057)
* letters, additional Latin:             Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* letters, ending:                       \closing.           (line 9562)
* letters, starting:                     \opening.           (line 9632)
* letters, writing:                      Letters.            (line 9439)
* line break, forcing:                   \\.                 (line 4512)
* line breaking:                         Line breaking.      (line 4501)
* line breaks, forcing:                  \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
                                                             (line 4627)
* line breaks, preventing:               \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
                                                             (line 4627)
* lines in tables:                       tabular.            (line 3957)
* lining numerals:                       Font styles.        (line 1352)
* lining text up in tables:              tabular.            (line 3957)
* lining text up using tab stops:        tabbing.            (line 3768)
* list items, specifying counter:        \usecounter.        (line 5547)
* list of figures file:                  Output files.       (line  426)
* list of tables file:                   Output files.       (line  426)
* listings package:                      tabbing.            (line 3906)
* lists of items:                        itemize.            (line 2979)
* lists of items, generic:               list.               (line 3067)
* lists of items, numbered:              enumerate.          (line 2677)
* loading additional packages:           Additional packages.
                                                             (line  802)
* log file:                              Output files.       (line  411)
* logo, LaTeX:                           Text symbols.       (line 8892)
* logo, LaTeX2e:                         Text symbols.       (line 8895)
* logo, TeX:                             Text symbols.       (line 8932)
* long command:                          Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  902)
* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols.    (line 8923)
* low-level font commands:               Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1392)
* Lower case:                            Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8820)
* LR mode:                               Modes.              (line 7153)
* ltugboat class:                        tugboat template.   (line 9810)
* LuaTeX:                                TeX engines.        (line  458)
* m-width:                               Units of length.    (line 5722)
* macro package, LaTeX as:               Overview.           (line  340)
* macron accent:                         Accents.            (line 9080)
* macron accent, math:                   Math accents.       (line 6982)
* macros2e package:                      \makeatletter and \makeatother.
                                                             (line  593)
* Madsen, Lars:                          eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* makeidx package:                       Indexes.            (line 9421)
* makeindex program:                     Indexes.            (line 9416)
* making a title page:                   titlepage.          (line 4408)
* making paragraphs:                     Making paragraphs.  (line 5811)
* marginal notes:                        Marginal notes.     (line 5851)
* masculine ordinal symbol:              Text symbols.       (line 9006)
* math accents:                          Math accents.       (line 6974)
* math formulas:                         Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* math functions:                        Math functions.     (line 6866)
* math miscellany:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7069)
* math mode:                             Modes.              (line 7153)
* math mode, entering:                   Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* math mode, spacing:                    Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7026)
* math symbols:                          Math symbols.       (line 5971)
* math, bold:                            Font styles.        (line 1348)
* mfirstuc package:                      Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8859)
* Millimeter:                            Units of length.    (line 5711)
* minipage, creating a:                  minipage.           (line 3432)
* minted package:                        tabbing.            (line 3906)
* modes:                                 Modes.              (line 7153)
* monospace font:                        Font styles.        (line 1310)
* moving arguments:                      \protect.           (line 5361)
* mpfootnote counter:                    \footnote.          (line 4753)
* mu, math unit:                         Units of length.    (line 5733)
* multicolumn text:                      \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
* multilingual support:                  Accents.            (line 9057)
* multind package:                       Indexes.            (line 9432)
* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math miscellany.
                                                             (line 7070)
* nested \include, not allowed:          \include.           (line 9275)
* new class commands:                    Class and package construction.
                                                             (line  818)
* new command, check:                    Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  900)
* new command, definition:               Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  975)
* new commands, defining:                \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4934)
* new commands, defining <1>:            \providecommand.    (line 5025)
* new line, output as input:             \obeycr & \restorecr.
                                                             (line 4544)
* new line, starting:                    \\.                 (line 4512)
* new line, starting (paragraph mode):   \newline.           (line 4553)
* new page, starting:                    \newpage.           (line 4667)
* non-English characters:                Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* notes in the margin:                   Marginal notes.     (line 5851)
* null delimiter:                        Math miscellany.    (line 7099)
* numbered items, specifying counter:    \usecounter.        (line 5547)
* numerals, old-style:                   Font styles.        (line 1352)
* oblique font:                          Font styles.        (line 1307)
* oe ligature:                           Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9195)
* ogonek:                                Accents.            (line 9121)
* old-style numerals:                    Font styles.        (line 1352)
* one-column output:                     \onecolumn.         (line 1539)
* opening quote:                         Text symbols.       (line 8911)
* OpenType fonts:                        TeX engines.        (line  435)
* options, class:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* options, color package:                Color package options.
                                                             (line 7822)
* options, document class:               Document class options.
                                                             (line  703)
* options, document class <1>:           Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* options, global:                       Additional packages.
                                                             (line  811)
* options, graphics package:             Graphics package options.
                                                             (line 8093)
* options, package:                      Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* options, package <1>:                  Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* ordinals, feminine and masculine:      Text symbols.       (line 9006)
* oslash:                                Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9191)
* overbar accent:                        Accents.            (line 9080)
* overdot accent, math:                  Math accents.       (line 6994)
* overview of LaTeX:                     Overview.           (line  335)
* package file layout:                   Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* package options:                       Class and package structure.
                                                             (line  841)
* package options <1>:                   Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* package, algorithm2e:                  tabbing.            (line 3906)
* package, amsmath:                      array.              (line 2437)
* package, amsmath <1>:                  displaymath.        (line 2613)
* package, babel:                        thebibliography.    (line 4302)
* package, babel <1>:                    Accents.            (line 9057)
* package, datetime:                     \today.             (line 9245)
* package, enumitem:                     list.               (line 3085)
* package, etoolbox:                     Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  989)
* package, fancyvrb:                     tabbing.            (line 3906)
* package, flafter:                      Floats.             (line 1898)
* package, float:                        Floats.             (line 1868)
* package, footmisc:                     Footnotes in section headings.
                                                             (line 4857)
* package, geometry:                     Document class options.
                                                             (line  737)
* package, geometry <1>:                 Document class options.
                                                             (line  741)
* package, listings:                     tabbing.            (line 3906)
* package, macros2e:                     \makeatletter and \makeatother.
                                                             (line  593)
* package, makeidx:                      Indexes.            (line 9421)
* package, mfirstuc:                     Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8859)
* package, minted:                       tabbing.            (line 3906)
* package, multind:                      Indexes.            (line 9432)
* package, picture:                      picture.            (line 3477)
* package, setspace:                     Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1504)
* package, showidx:                      Indexes.            (line 9428)
* package, textcase:                     Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8856)
* package, textcomp:                     Font styles.        (line 1352)
* package, xspace:                       \(SPACE) after control sequence.
                                                             (line 7480)
* packages, loading additional:          Additional packages.
                                                             (line  802)
* page break, forcing:                   \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
                                                             (line 4688)
* page break, preventing:                \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
                                                             (line 4688)
* page breaking:                         Page breaking.      (line 4644)
* page layout parameters:                Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* page number, cross referencing:        \pageref.           (line 2297)
* page numbering style:                  \pagenumbering.     (line 7255)
* page styles:                           Page styles.        (line 7223)
* page, colored:                         Colored pages.      (line 8035)
* paragraph indentation, in minipage:    minipage.           (line 3443)
* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* paragraph mode:                        Modes.              (line 7153)
* paragraph mode <1>:                    \parbox.            (line 7718)
* paragraph symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 8915)
* paragraphs:                            Making paragraphs.  (line 5811)
* parameters, for footnotes:             Footnote parameters.
                                                             (line 4913)
* parameters, page layout:               Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* PDF graphic files:                     Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* PDF graphic files <1>:                 \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* pdfTeX:                                Output files.       (line  403)
* pdfTeX engine:                         TeX engines.        (line  441)
* period, centered, in text:             Text symbols.       (line 9009)
* pica:                                  Units of length.    (line 5698)
* pict2e package:                        \line.              (line 3623)
* picture package:                       picture.            (line 3477)
* pictures, creating:                    picture.            (line 3460)
* pilcrow:                               Text symbols.       (line 8915)
* placement of floats:                   Floats.             (line 1847)
* PNG files:                             Graphics package configuration.
                                                             (line 8157)
* PNG files <1>:                         \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* poetry, an environment for:            verse.              (line 4482)
* Point:                                 Units of length.    (line 5694)
* polish l:                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9183)
* portrait orientation:                  Document class options.
                                                             (line  757)
* position, in picture:                  picture.            (line 3482)
* positional parameter:                  \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4965)
* postscript, in letters:                \ps.                (line 9645)
* pounds symbol:                         Text symbols.       (line 8919)
* preamble, defined:                     Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  374)
* predefined lengths:                    Predefined lengths. (line 5792)
* prompt, *:                             Command line.       (line 9743)
* pronunciation:                         Overview.           (line  353)
* quad:                                  Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7052)
* question mark, upside-down:            Text symbols.       (line 9012)
* quotation marks, French:               Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* quote, single straight:                Text symbols.       (line 9027)
* quote, straight base:                  Text symbols.       (line 9031)
* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* ragged left text:                      \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
* ragged left text, environment for:     flushright.         (line 2953)
* ragged right text:                     \raggedright.       (line 2940)
* ragged right text, environment for:    flushleft.          (line 2927)
* redefining environments:               \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5094)
* reference, forward:                    Cross references.   (line 2231)
* references, resolving forward:         Output files.       (line  416)
* registered symbol:                     Text symbols.       (line 9034)
* remarks in the margin:                 Marginal notes.     (line 5851)
* reporting bugs:                        About this document.
                                                             (line  306)
* reserved characters:                   Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8786)
* resizing:                              \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* resizing <1>:                          \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* right angle quotation marks:           Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* right arrow, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 9037)
* right brace, in text:                  Text symbols.       (line 8959)
* right quote:                           Text symbols.       (line 8926)
* right quote, double:                   Text symbols.       (line 9018)
* right quote, single:                   Text symbols.       (line 9024)
* right-hand equation numbers:           Document class options.
                                                             (line  760)
* right-justifying text:                 \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright.        (line 2953)
* ring accent:                           Accents.            (line 9126)
* ring accent, math:                     Math accents.       (line 7009)
* robust commands:                       \protect.           (line 5348)
* roman font:                            Font styles.        (line 1298)
* root file:                             Splitting the input.
                                                             (line 9254)
* rotating graphics:                     \rotatebox.         (line 8658)
* rotating text:                         \rotatebox.         (line 8658)
* rotation:                              \rotatebox.         (line 8658)
* row, tabbing:                          tabbing.            (line 3807)
* rubber lengths, defining new:          \newlength.         (line 5064)
* running header and footer:             Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* running header and footer style:       \pagestyle.         (line 7280)
* sans serif font:                       Font styles.        (line 1304)
* Scaled point:                          Units of length.    (line 5720)
* scaling:                               \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* scaling <1>:                           \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* script letters for math:               Font styles.        (line 1292)
* section number, cross referencing:     \ref.               (line 2318)
* section numbers, printing:             Sectioning.         (line 2013)
* section symbol:                        Text symbols.       (line 8929)
* section, redefining:                   \@startsection.     (line 2025)
* sectioning commands:                   Sectioning.         (line 1972)
* series, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1434)
* setspace package:                      Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1504)
* setting counters:                      \setcounter.        (line 5602)
* shapes, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1474)
* sharp S letters:                       Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9199)
* showidx package:                       Indexes.            (line 9428)
* simulating typed text:                 verbatim.           (line 4447)
* single angle quotation marks:          Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* single guillemets:                     Text symbols.       (line 8901)
* single left quote:                     Text symbols.       (line 9021)
* single low-9 quotation mark:           Text symbols.       (line 8923)
* single quote, straight:                Text symbols.       (line 9027)
* single right quote:                    Text symbols.       (line 9024)
* sizes of text:                         Font sizes.         (line 1366)
* skip register, plain TeX:              \newlength.         (line 5064)
* slanted font:                          Font styles.        (line 1307)
* small caps font:                       Font styles.        (line 1301)
* space, inserting vertical:             \addvspace.         (line 7541)
* space, vertical:                       \vspace.            (line 7610)
* spaces:                                Spaces.             (line 7323)
* spaces, ignore around commands:        \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
                                                             (line 5400)
* spacing within math mode:              Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7026)
* spacing, inter-sentence:               \frenchspacing.     (line 7448)
* spacing, inter-sentence <1>:           \normalsfcodes.     (line 7461)
* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols.    (line 9006)
* special characters:                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8786)
* special characters <1>:                Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9153)
* special insertions:                    Special insertions. (line 8780)
* specifier, float placement:            Floats.             (line 1847)
* splitting the input file:              Splitting the input.
                                                             (line 9251)
* stable option to footmisc package:     Footnotes in section headings.
                                                             (line 4857)
* star-variants, commands:               \@ifstar.           (line  609)
* starred form, defining new commands:   \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4942)
* starting a new page:                   \newpage.           (line 4667)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage.       (line 4660)
* starting and ending:                   Starting and ending.
                                                             (line  361)
* starting on a right-hand page:         \cleardoublepage.   (line 4651)
* sterling symbol:                       Text symbols.       (line 8919)
* straight double quote, base:           Text symbols.       (line 9031)
* straight quote, base:                  Text symbols.       (line 9031)
* straight single quote:                 Text symbols.       (line 9027)
* stretch, infinite horizontal:          \hfill.             (line 7355)
* stretch, infinite vertical:            \vfill.             (line 7584)
* stretch, omitting vertical:            \raggedbottom.      (line 1679)
* styles of text:                        Font styles.        (line 1224)
* styles, page:                          Page styles.        (line 7223)
* subscript:                             Subscripts & superscripts.
                                                             (line 5938)
* superscript:                           Subscripts & superscripts.
                                                             (line 5938)
* symbols, math:                         Math symbols.       (line 5971)
* symbols, text:                         Text symbols.       (line 8877)
* tab stops, using:                      tabbing.            (line 3768)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
                                                             (line 9335)
* table of contents file:                Output files.       (line  426)
* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
                                                             (line 4853)
* table of contents, creating:           Tables of contents. (line 9314)
* tables, creating:                      table.              (line 3915)
* template, beamer:                      beamer template.    (line 9759)
* template, book:                        book template.      (line 9790)
* template, TUGboat:                     tugboat template.   (line 9810)
* templates, document:                   Document templates. (line 9752)
* terminal input/output:                 Terminal input/output.
                                                             (line 9698)
* TeX logo:                              Text symbols.       (line 8932)
* text symbols:                          Text symbols.       (line 8877)
* text, resizing:                        \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* text, resizing <1>:                    \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* text, scaling:                         \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* text, scaling <1>:                     \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* textcase package:                      Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8856)
* textcomp package:                      Font styles.        (line 1352)
* thanks, for titlepage:                 \maketitle.         (line 7245)
* theorem-like environment:              \newtheorem.        (line 5201)
* theorems, defining:                    \newtheorem.        (line 5201)
* theorems, typesetting:                 theorem.            (line 4395)
* thorn, Icelandic letter:               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9203)
* three-quarters em-dash:                Text symbols.       (line 9040)
* tie-after accent:                      Accents.            (line 9132)
* tilde accent:                          Accents.            (line 9094)
* tilde accent, math:                    Math accents.       (line 7012)
* tilde, ASCII, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8938)
* title page, separate or run-in:        Document class options.
                                                             (line  768)
* title pages, creating:                 titlepage.          (line 4408)
* title, for titlepage:                  \maketitle.         (line 7249)
* titles, making:                        \maketitle.         (line 7229)
* trademark symbol:                      Text symbols.       (line 9043)
* transcript file:                       Output files.       (line  411)
* TrueType fonts:                        TeX engines.        (line  435)
* TUGboat template:                      tugboat template.   (line 9810)
* two-column output:                     \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
* two-thirds em-dash:                    Text symbols.       (line 9046)
* type styles:                           Font styles.        (line 1224)
* typed text, simulating:                verbatim.           (line 4447)
* typeface sizes:                        Font sizes.         (line 1366)
* typefaces:                             Fonts.              (line 1218)
* typewriter font:                       Font styles.        (line 1310)
* typewriter labels in lists:            description.        (line 2572)
* umlaut accent:                         Accents.            (line 9067)
* underbar:                              Accents.            (line 9140)
* underscore, in text:                   Text symbols.       (line 9049)
* Unicode input, native:                 TeX engines.        (line  435)
* units, of length:                      Units of length.    (line 5690)
* unofficial nature of this manual:      About this document.
                                                             (line  302)
* unordered lists:                       itemize.            (line 2979)
* Upper case:                            Upper and lower case.
                                                             (line 8820)
* using BibTeX:                          Using BibTeX.       (line 4358)
* UTF-8:                                 TeX engines.        (line  435)
* variables, a list of:                  Counters.           (line 5473)
* vector symbol, math:                   Math accents.       (line 7015)
* verbatim text:                         verbatim.           (line 4447)
* verbatim text, inline:                 \verb.              (line 4465)
* vertical bar, double, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 8950)
* vertical bar, in text:                 Text symbols.       (line 8947)
* vertical space:                        \addvspace.         (line 7541)
* vertical space <1>:                    \vspace.            (line 7610)
* vertical space before paragraphs:      \parskip.           (line 5845)
* visible space:                         \verb.              (line 4476)
* visible space symbol, in text:         Text symbols.       (line 9052)
* weights, of fonts:                     Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1444)
* white space:                           Spaces.             (line 7323)
* wide hat accent, math:                 Math accents.       (line 7018)
* wide tilde accent, math:               Math accents.       (line 7021)
* widths, of fonts:                      Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1456)
* writing external files:                filecontents.       (line 2876)
* writing letters:                       Letters.            (line 9439)
* x-height:                              Units of length.    (line 5722)
* XeTeX:                                 TeX engines.        (line  467)
* xindy program:                         Indexes.            (line 9416)
* xspace package:                        \(SPACE) after control sequence.
                                                             (line 7480)

Command Index
*************

* Menu:

* $:                                     Math formulas.      (line 5919)
* &:                                     tabular.            (line 3983)
* --help command-line option:            Command line.       (line 9739)
* .aux file:                             Output files.       (line  416)
* .dvi file:                             Output files.       (line  393)
* .fd file:                              \newfont.           (line 5323)
* .lof file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
* .lof file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9324)
* .log file:                             Output files.       (line  411)
* .lot file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
* .lot file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9324)
* .pdf file:                             Output files.       (line  403)
* .tex, default extension:               Command line.       (line 9731)
* .toc file:                             Output files.       (line  426)
* .toc file <1>:                         Tables of contents. (line 9314)
* .xdv file:                             TeX engines.        (line  467)
* 10pt option:                           Document class options.
                                                             (line  711)
* 11pt option:                           Document class options.
                                                             (line  711)
* 12pt option:                           Document class options.
                                                             (line  711)
* [...] for optional arguments:          LaTeX command syntax.
                                                             (line  486)
* \ character starting commands:         LaTeX command syntax.
                                                             (line  486)
* \!:                                    Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7049)
* \" (umlaut accent):                    Accents.            (line 9067)
* \#:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \$:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \%:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \&:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \' (acute accent):                     Accents.            (line 9071)
* \' (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3848)
* \(:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5911)
* \(SPACE):                              \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7416)
* \):                                    Math formulas.      (line 5911)
* \*:                                    Math miscellany.    (line 7069)
* \+:                                    tabbing.            (line 3840)
* \,:                                    Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7045)
* \-:                                    tabbing.            (line 3844)
* \- (hyphenation):                      \- (hyphenation).   (line 4574)
* \. (dot-over accent):                  Accents.            (line 9076)
* \/:                                    \/.                 (line 7493)
* \::                                    Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7041)
* \;:                                    Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7036)
* \<:                                    tabbing.            (line 3836)
* \= (macron accent):                    Accents.            (line 9080)
* \= (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3830)
* \>:                                    tabbing.            (line 3834)
* \> <1>:                                Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7041)
* \> (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3833)
* \@:                                    \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7416)
* \@beginparpenalty:                     list.               (line 3312)
* \@endparpenalty:                       list.               (line 3320)
* \@fnsymbol:                            \footnote.          (line 4741)
* \@ifstar:                              \@ifstar.           (line  609)
* \@itempenalty:                         list.               (line 3316)
* \@startsection:                        \@startsection.     (line 2025)
* \a (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3863)
* \a' (acute accent in tabbing):         tabbing.            (line 3864)
* \a= (macron accent in tabbing):        tabbing.            (line 3864)
* \aa (aa):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9159)
* \AA (AA):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9159)
* \acute:                                Math accents.       (line 6978)
* \addcontentsline:                      \addcontentsline.   (line 9335)
* \address:                              \address.           (line 9519)
* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}:             \addtocontents.     (line 9369)
* \addtocounter:                         \addtocounter.      (line 5618)
* \addtolength:                          \addtolength.       (line 5752)
* \addvspace:                            \addvspace.         (line 7541)
* \ae (ae):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9163)
* \AE (AE):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9163)
* \aleph:                                Math symbols.       (line 5987)
* \Alph example:                         enumerate.          (line 2732)
* \alpha:                                Math symbols.       (line 5990)
* \alph{COUNTER}:                        \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5507)
* \Alph{COUNTER}:                        \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5510)
* \alsoname:                             Indexes.            (line 9413)
* \amalg:                                Math symbols.       (line 5993)
* \and for \author:                      \maketitle.         (line 7235)
* \angle:                                Math symbols.       (line 5996)
* \appendix:                             Sectioning.         (line 2003)
* \approx:                               Math symbols.       (line 6001)
* \arabic{COUNTER}:                      \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5513)
* \arccos:                               Math functions.     (line 6869)
* \arcsin:                               Math functions.     (line 6872)
* \arctan:                               Math functions.     (line 6875)
* \arg:                                  Math functions.     (line 6878)
* \arraycolsep:                          array.              (line 2434)
* \arrayrulewidth:                       tabular.            (line 4107)
* \arraystretch:                         tabular.            (line 4113)
* \ast:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6004)
* \asymp:                                Math symbols.       (line 6013)
* \AtBeginDocument:                      \AtBeginDocument.   (line 2645)
* \AtBeginDvi:                           Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  888)
* \AtEndDocument:                        \AtEndDocument.     (line 2661)
* \AtEndOfClass:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  893)
* \AtEndOfPackage:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  893)
* \author{NAME \and NAME2}:              \maketitle.         (line 7234)
* \a` (grave accent in tabbing):         tabbing.            (line 3864)
* \b (bar-under accent):                 Accents.            (line 9097)
* \backslash:                            Math symbols.       (line 6016)
* \bar:                                  Math accents.       (line 6981)
* \baselineskip:                         Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1487)
* \baselinestretch:                      Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1497)
* \begin:                                Environments.       (line 2340)
* \beta:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6020)
* \bf:                                   Font styles.        (line 1288)
* \bfseries:                             Font styles.        (line 1257)
* \bibitem:                              \bibitem.           (line 4314)
* \bibliography:                         Using BibTeX.       (line 4358)
* \bibliographystyle:                    Using BibTeX.       (line 4358)
* \bibname:                              thebibliography.    (line 4296)
* \bigcap:                               Math symbols.       (line 6023)
* \bigcirc:                              Math symbols.       (line 6027)
* \bigcup:                               Math symbols.       (line 6031)
* \bigodot:                              Math symbols.       (line 6035)
* \bigoplus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6038)
* \bigotimes:                            Math symbols.       (line 6041)
* \bigskip:                              \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7566)
* \bigskipamount:                        \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7567)
* \bigsqcup:                             Math symbols.       (line 6052)
* \bigtriangledown:                      Math symbols.       (line 6044)
* \bigtriangleup:                        Math symbols.       (line 6048)
* \biguplus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6055)
* \bigvee:                               Math symbols.       (line 6059)
* \bigwedge:                             Math symbols.       (line 6062)
* \bmod:                                 Math functions.     (line 6881)
* \boldmath:                             Math formulas.      (line 5924)
* \bot:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6065)
* \bottomfraction:                       Floats.             (line 1910)
* \bottomfraction <1>:                   Floats.             (line 1911)
* \bowtie:                               Math symbols.       (line 6070)
* \Box:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6073)
* \breve:                                Math accents.       (line 6984)
* \bullet:                               Math symbols.       (line 6078)
* \c (cedilla accent):                   Accents.            (line 9102)
* \cal:                                  Font styles.        (line 1291)
* \cap:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6081)
* \capitalacute:                         Accents.            (line 9071)
* \capitalbreve:                         Accents.            (line 9137)
* \capitalcaron:                         Accents.            (line 9148)
* \capitalcedilla:                       Accents.            (line 9102)
* \capitalcircumflex:                    Accents.            (line 9084)
* \capitaldieresis:                      Accents.            (line 9067)
* \capitaldotaccent:                     Accents.            (line 9106)
* \capitalgrave:                         Accents.            (line 9088)
* \capitalhungarumlaut:                  Accents.            (line 9110)
* \capitalmacron:                        Accents.            (line 9080)
* \capitalnewtie:                        Accents.            (line 9132)
* \capitalogonek:                        Accents.            (line 9121)
* \capitalring:                          Accents.            (line 9126)
* \capitaltie:                           Accents.            (line 9132)
* \capitaltilde:                         Accents.            (line 9094)
* \caption:                              figure.             (line 2857)
* \caption <1>:                          table.              (line 3935)
* \cc:                                   \cc.                (line 9546)
* \cdot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6086)
* \cdots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7088)
* \centering:                            \centering.         (line 2512)
* \chapter:                              Sectioning.         (line 1975)
* \check:                                Math accents.       (line 6987)
* \CheckCommand:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  900)
* \CheckCommand*:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  900)
* \chi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6089)
* \circ:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6092)
* \circle:                               \circle.            (line 3535)
* \cite:                                 \cite.              (line 4333)
* \ClassError:                           Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \ClassInfo:                            Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \ClassInfoNoLine:                      Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \ClassWarning:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \ClassWarningNoLine:                   Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \cleardoublepage:                      \cleardoublepage.   (line 4651)
* \clearpage:                            \clearpage.         (line 4660)
* \cline:                                \cline.             (line 4240)
* \closing:                              \closing.           (line 9562)
* \clubsuit:                             Math symbols.       (line 6097)
* \columnsep:                            \twocolumn.         (line 1564)
* \columnsep <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1690)
* \columnsep <2>:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1693)
* \columnseprule:                        \twocolumn.         (line 1570)
* \columnseprule <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1691)
* \columnseprule <2>:                    Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1693)
* \columnwidth:                          \twocolumn.         (line 1577)
* \columnwidth <1>:                      Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1692)
* \columnwidth <2>:                      Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1693)
* \complement:                           Math symbols.       (line 6100)
* \cong:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6106)
* \contentsline:                         \addcontentsline.   (line 9362)
* \coprod:                               Math symbols.       (line 6109)
* \copyright:                            Text symbols.       (line 8881)
* \cos:                                  Math functions.     (line 6884)
* \cosh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6887)
* \cot:                                  Math functions.     (line 6890)
* \coth:                                 Math functions.     (line 6893)
* \csc:                                  Math functions.     (line 6896)
* \cup:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6112)
* \CurrentOption:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  939)
* \d (dot-under accent):                 Accents.            (line 9106)
* \dag:                                  Text symbols.       (line 8885)
* \dagger:                               Math symbols.       (line 6117)
* \dashbox:                              \dashbox.           (line 3590)
* \dashv:                                Math symbols.       (line 6120)
* \date{TEXT}:                           \maketitle.         (line 7240)
* \day:                                  \day \month \year.  (line 5651)
* \dblfloatpagefraction:                 \twocolumn.         (line 1611)
* \dblfloatsep:                          \twocolumn.         (line 1617)
* \dbltextfloatsep:                      \twocolumn.         (line 1624)
* \dbltopfraction:                       \twocolumn.         (line 1589)
* \dbltopnumber:                         \twocolumn.         (line 1629)
* \ddag:                                 Text symbols.       (line 8888)
* \ddagger:                              Math symbols.       (line 6124)
* \ddot:                                 Math accents.       (line 6990)
* \ddots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7092)
* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions:            \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
                                                             (line 8231)
* \DeclareGraphicsRule:                  \DeclareGraphicsRule.
                                                             (line 8270)
* \DeclareOption:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* \DeclareOption*:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  945)
* \DeclareRobustCommand:                 Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  975)
* \DeclareRobustCommand*:                Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  975)
* \deg:                                  Math functions.     (line 6899)
* \Delta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6127)
* \delta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6130)
* \depth:                                Predefined lengths. (line 5796)
* \det:                                  Math functions.     (line 6902)
* \dh (d):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9167)
* \DH (D):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9167)
* \Diamond:                              Math symbols.       (line 6133)
* \diamond:                              Math symbols.       (line 6137)
* \diamondsuit:                          Math symbols.       (line 6141)
* \dim:                                  Math functions.     (line 6905)
* \displaystyle:                         Math formulas.      (line 5929)
* \div:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6144)
* \dj:                                   Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9173)
* \DJ:                                   Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9173)
* \documentclass:                        Document classes.   (line  669)
* \dot:                                  Math accents.       (line 6993)
* \doteq:                                Math symbols.       (line 6147)
* \dotfill:                              \hrulefill \dotfill.
                                                             (line 7518)
* \dots:                                 Text symbols.       (line 8905)
* \doublerulesep:                        tabular.            (line 4118)
* \downarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6151)
* \Downarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6155)
* \ell:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6159)
* \emph:                                 Font styles.        (line 1277)
* \emptyset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6162)
* \encl:                                 \encl.              (line 9574)
* \end:                                  Environments.       (line 2340)
* \enlargethispage:                      \enlargethispage.   (line 4673)
* \enumi:                                enumerate.          (line 2718)
* \enumii:                               enumerate.          (line 2718)
* \enumiii:                              enumerate.          (line 2718)
* \enumiv:                               enumerate.          (line 2718)
* \epsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6166)
* \equiv:                                Math symbols.       (line 6172)
* \eta:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6175)
* \evensidemargin:                       Document class options.
                                                             (line  781)
* \evensidemargin <1>:                   Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1751)
* \evensidemargin <2>:                   Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1752)
* \ExecuteOptions:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1045)
* \exists:                               Math symbols.       (line 6178)
* \exp:                                  Math functions.     (line 6908)
* \extracolsep:                          tabular.            (line 4066)
* \fbox:                                 \fbox and \framebox.
                                                             (line 7653)
* \fboxrule:                             \framebox (picture).
                                                             (line 3584)
* \fboxrule <1>:                         \fbox and \framebox.
                                                             (line 7665)
* \fboxsep:                              \framebox (picture).
                                                             (line 3584)
* \fboxsep <1>:                          \fbox and \framebox.
                                                             (line 7665)
* \fill:                                 \hfill.             (line 7358)
* \flat:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6181)
* \floatpagefraction:                    Floats.             (line 1914)
* \floatpagefraction <1>:                Floats.             (line 1915)
* \floatsep:                             Floats.             (line 1930)
* \floatsep <1>:                         Floats.             (line 1931)
* \flushbottom:                          \flushbottom.       (line 1658)
* \fnsymbol, and footnotes:              \footnote.          (line 4741)
* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}:                    \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5522)
* \fontencoding:                         Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1397)
* \fontfamily:                           Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1407)
* \fontseries:                           Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1434)
* \fontshape:                            Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1474)
* \fontsize:                             Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1487)
* \footnote:                             \footnote.          (line 4724)
* \footnotemark:                         \footnotemark.      (line 4762)
* \footnoterule:                         Footnote parameters.
                                                             (line 4913)
* \footnotesep:                          Footnote parameters.
                                                             (line 4919)
* \footnotesize:                         Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \footnotetext:                         \footnotetext.      (line 4794)
* \footskip:                             Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1710)
* \footskip <1>:                         Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1711)
* \forall:                               Math symbols.       (line 6184)
* \frac:                                 Math miscellany.    (line 7096)
* \frac{NUM}{DEN}:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7095)
* \frame:                                \frame.             (line 3605)
* \framebox:                             \framebox (picture).
                                                             (line 3576)
* \framebox <1>:                         \fbox and \framebox.
                                                             (line 7653)
* \frenchspacing:                        \frenchspacing.     (line 7448)
* \frown:                                Math symbols.       (line 6187)
* \fussy:                                \fussy.             (line 4593)
* \Gamma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6190)
* \gamma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6193)
* \gcd:                                  Math functions.     (line 6911)
* \ge:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6196)
* \geq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6200)
* \gets:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6204)
* \gg:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6207)
* \glossary:                             Glossaries.         (line 9386)
* \glossaryentry:                        Glossaries.         (line 9389)
* \graphicspath:                         \graphicspath.      (line 8169)
* \grave:                                Math accents.       (line 6996)
* \guillemotleft (<<):                   Text symbols.       (line 8897)
* \guillemotright (>>):                  Text symbols.       (line 8898)
* \guilsinglleft (<):                    Text symbols.       (line 8899)
* \guilsinglright (>):                   Text symbols.       (line 8900)
* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent):          Accents.            (line 9110)
* \hat:                                  Math accents.       (line 6999)
* \hbar:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6211)
* \headheight:                           Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1698)
* \headheight <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1699)
* \headsep:                              Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1703)
* \headsep <1>:                          Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1704)
* \heartsuit:                            Math symbols.       (line 6214)
* \height:                               Predefined lengths. (line 5794)
* \hfill:                                \hfill.             (line 7355)
* \hline:                                \hline.             (line 4262)
* \hom:                                  Math functions.     (line 6914)
* \hookleftarrow:                        Math symbols.       (line 6217)
* \hookrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6220)
* \hrulefill:                            \hrulefill \dotfill.
                                                             (line 7518)
* \hsize:                                Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1803)
* \hsize <1>:                            Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1803)
* \hspace:                               \hspace.            (line 7328)
* \huge:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \Huge:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \hyphenation:                          \hyphenation.       (line 4611)
* \i (dotless i):                        Accents.            (line 9114)
* \iff:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6223)
* \IfFileExists:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1006)
* \ignorespaces:                         \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
                                                             (line 5400)
* \ignorespacesafterend:                 \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
                                                             (line 5400)
* \ij (ij):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9179)
* \IJ (IJ):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9179)
* \Im:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6227)
* \imath:                                Math accents.       (line 7002)
* \in:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6230)
* \include:                              \include.           (line 9263)
* \includegraphics:                      \includegraphics.   (line 8349)
* \includeonly:                          \includeonly.       (line 9281)
* \indent:                               \indent.            (line 5819)
* \index:                                Indexes.            (line 9402)
* \indexentry:                           Indexes.            (line 9405)
* \indexspace:                           Indexes.            (line 9425)
* \inf:                                  Math functions.     (line 6917)
* \infty:                                Math symbols.       (line 6236)
* \input:                                \input.             (line 9296)
* \InputIfFileExists:                    Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1006)
* \int:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6239)
* \intextsep:                            Floats.             (line 1934)
* \intextsep <1>:                        Floats.             (line 1935)
* \iota:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6242)
* \it:                                   Font styles.        (line 1294)
* \item:                                 description.        (line 2567)
* \item <1>:                             enumerate.          (line 2700)
* \item <2>:                             itemize.            (line 2979)
* \item <3>:                             itemize.            (line 3001)
* \itemindent:                           list.               (line 3141)
* \itemsep:                              list.               (line 3145)
* \itshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1251)
* \j (dotless j):                        Accents.            (line 9117)
* \jmath:                                Math accents.       (line 7005)
* \Join:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6245)
* \k (ogonek):                           Accents.            (line 9121)
* \kappa:                                Math symbols.       (line 6249)
* \ker:                                  Math functions.     (line 6920)
* \kill:                                 tabbing.            (line 3868)
* \l (/l):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9183)
* \L (/L):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9183)
* \label:                                \label.             (line 2246)
* \labelenumi:                           enumerate.          (line 2727)
* \labelenumii:                          enumerate.          (line 2727)
* \labelenumiii:                         enumerate.          (line 2727)
* \labelenumiv:                          enumerate.          (line 2727)
* \labelitemi:                           itemize.            (line 3008)
* \labelitemii:                          itemize.            (line 3008)
* \labelitemiii:                         itemize.            (line 3008)
* \labelitemiv:                          itemize.            (line 3008)
* \labelsep:                             list.               (line 3157)
* \labelwidth:                           list.               (line 3162)
* \Lambda:                               Math symbols.       (line 6252)
* \lambda:                               Math symbols.       (line 6255)
* \land:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6258)
* \langle:                               Math symbols.       (line 6263)
* \large:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \Large:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \LARGE:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \LaTeX:                                Text symbols.       (line 8891)
* \LaTeXe:                               Text symbols.       (line 8894)
* \lbrace:                               Math symbols.       (line 6268)
* \lbrack:                               Math symbols.       (line 6272)
* \lceil:                                Math symbols.       (line 6276)
* \ldots:                                Text symbols.       (line 8904)
* \le:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6280)
* \leadsto:                              Math symbols.       (line 6284)
* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2:        Math miscellany.    (line 7098)
* \Leftarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6291)
* \leftarrow:                            Math symbols.       (line 6296)
* \lefteqn:                              eqnarray.           (line 2784)
* \leftharpoondown:                      Math symbols.       (line 6300)
* \leftharpoonup:                        Math symbols.       (line 6303)
* \leftmargin:                           itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmargin <1>:                       list.               (line 3182)
* \leftmargini:                          itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmarginii:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmarginiii:                        itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmarginiv:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmarginv:                          itemize.            (line 3027)
* \leftmarginvi:                         itemize.            (line 3027)
* \Leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6306)
* \leftrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6311)
* \leq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6316)
* \lfloor:                               Math symbols.       (line 6320)
* \lg:                                   Math functions.     (line 6923)
* \lhd:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6323)
* \lim:                                  Math functions.     (line 6926)
* \liminf:                               Math functions.     (line 6929)
* \limsup:                               Math functions.     (line 6932)
* \line:                                 \line.              (line 3616)
* \linebreak:                            \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
                                                             (line 4627)
* \linespread:                           Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1511)
* \linethickness:                        \linethickness.     (line 3630)
* \linewidth:                            Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1717)
* \linewidth <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1718)
* \listoffigures:                        Tables of contents. (line 9324)
* \listoftables:                         Tables of contents. (line 9324)
* \listparindent:                        list.               (line 3199)
* \ll:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6331)
* \ln:                                   Math functions.     (line 6935)
* \lnot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6335)
* \LoadClass:                            Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1023)
* \LoadClassWithOptions:                 Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1023)
* \location:                             \location.          (line 9590)
* \log:                                  Math functions.     (line 6938)
* \longleftarrow:                        Math symbols.       (line 6338)
* \longleftrightarrow:                   Math symbols.       (line 6343)
* \longmapsto:                           Math symbols.       (line 6347)
* \longrightarrow:                       Math symbols.       (line 6352)
* \lor:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6357)
* \lq:                                   Text symbols.       (line 8910)
* \makebox:                              \makebox.           (line 7689)
* \makebox (for picture):                \makebox (picture). (line 3548)
* \makeglossary:                         Glossaries.         (line 9384)
* \makeindex:                            Indexes.            (line 9399)
* \makelabel:                            list.               (line 3114)
* \makelabels:                           \makelabels.        (line 9600)
* \maketitle:                            \maketitle.         (line 7229)
* \mapsto:                               Math symbols.       (line 6360)
* \marginpar:                            Marginal notes.     (line 5851)
* \marginparpush:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1724)
* \marginparpush <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1727)
* \marginparpush <2>:                    Marginal notes.     (line 5881)
* \marginparsep:                         Marginal notes.     (line 5885)
* \marginparwidth:                       Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1726)
* \marginparwidth <1>:                   Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1727)
* \marginparwidth <2>:                   Marginal notes.     (line 5889)
* \marginsep:                            Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1725)
* \marginsep <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1727)
* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}:                \pagestyle.         (line 7303)
* \markright{RIGHT}:                     \pagestyle.         (line 7310)
* \mathbf:                               Font styles.        (line 1330)
* \mathcal:                              Font styles.        (line 1346)
* \mathdollar:                           Math miscellany.    (line 7103)
* \mathellipsis:                         Math miscellany.    (line 7106)
* \mathnormal:                           Font styles.        (line 1343)
* \mathparagraph:                        Math miscellany.    (line 7109)
* \mathring:                             Math accents.       (line 7008)
* \mathrm:                               Font styles.        (line 1327)
* \mathsection:                          Math miscellany.    (line 7112)
* \mathsf:                               Font styles.        (line 1333)
* \mathsterling:                         Math miscellany.    (line 7115)
* \mathtt:                               Font styles.        (line 1336)
* \mathunderscore:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7118)
* \mathversion:                          Font styles.        (line 1348)
* \max:                                  Math functions.     (line 6941)
* \mbox:                                 \mbox.              (line 7646)
* \mbox, and LR mode:                    Modes.              (line 7171)
* \mdseries:                             Font styles.        (line 1254)
* \medskip:                              \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7571)
* \medskipamount:                        \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7572)
* \medspace:                             Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7041)
* \mho:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6364)
* \mid:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6369)
* \min:                                  Math functions.     (line 6944)
* \models:                               Math symbols.       (line 6379)
* \month:                                \day \month \year.  (line 5651)
* \mp:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6384)
* \mu:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6387)
* \multicolumn:                          \multicolumn.       (line 4133)
* \multiput:                             \multiput.          (line 3654)
* \nabla:                                Math symbols.       (line 6390)
* \name:                                 \name.              (line 9622)
* \natural:                              Math symbols.       (line 6393)
* \ne:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6396)
* \nearrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6399)
* \NeedsTeXFormat:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1055)
* \neg:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6402)
* \neq:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6406)
* \newcommand:                           \newcommand & \renewcommand.
                                                             (line 4934)
* \newcounter:                           \newcounter.        (line 5040)
* \newenvironment:                       \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5094)
* \newfont:                              \newfont.           (line 5313)
* \newlength:                            \newlength.         (line 5064)
* \newline:                              \newline.           (line 4553)
* \NEWLINE:                              \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7416)
* \newpage:                              \newpage.           (line 4667)
* \newsavebox:                           \newsavebox.        (line 5079)
* \newtheorem:                           \newtheorem.        (line 5201)
* \newtie:                               Accents.            (line 9132)
* \ng:                                   Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9187)
* \NG:                                   Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9187)
* \ni:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6409)
* \nocite:                               \nocite.            (line 4348)
* \nocorr:                               Font styles.        (line 1239)
* \nocorrlist:                           Font styles.        (line 1239)
* \nofiles:                              Tables of contents. (line 9329)
* \noindent:                             \noindent.          (line 5830)
* \nolinebreak:                          \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
                                                             (line 4627)
* \nonfrenchspacing:                     \frenchspacing.     (line 7448)
* \nonumber:                             eqnarray.           (line 2779)
* \nopagebreak:                          \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
                                                             (line 4688)
* \normalfont:                           Font styles.        (line 1275)
* \normalmarginpar:                      Marginal notes.     (line 5869)
* \normalsfcodes:                        \normalsfcodes.     (line 7461)
* \normalsize:                           Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \not:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6414)
* \notin:                                Math symbols.       (line 6422)
* \nu:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6426)
* \nwarrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6429)
* \o (/o):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9191)
* \O (/O):                               Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9191)
* \obeycr:                               \obeycr & \restorecr.
                                                             (line 4544)
* \oddsidemargin:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  781)
* \oddsidemargin <1>:                    Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1750)
* \oddsidemargin <2>:                    Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1752)
* \odot:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6432)
* \oe (oe):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9195)
* \OE (OE):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9195)
* \oint:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6437)
* \oldstylenums:                         Font styles.        (line 1352)
* \Omega:                                Math symbols.       (line 6441)
* \omega:                                Math symbols.       (line 6444)
* \ominus:                               Math symbols.       (line 6447)
* \onecolumn:                            \onecolumn.         (line 1539)
* \opening:                              \opening.           (line 9632)
* \oplus:                                Math symbols.       (line 6450)
* \OptionNotUsed:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1071)
* \oslash:                               Math symbols.       (line 6454)
* \otimes:                               Math symbols.       (line 6457)
* \oval:                                 \oval.              (line 3665)
* \overbrace{MATH}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7121)
* \overline{TEXT}:                       Math miscellany.    (line 7125)
* \owns:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6462)
* \P:                                    Text symbols.       (line 8913)
* \PackageError:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \PackageInfo:                          Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \PackageInfoNoLine:                    Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \PackageWarning:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \PackageWarningNoLine:                 Class and package commands.
                                                             (line  920)
* \pagebreak:                            \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
                                                             (line 4688)
* \pagenumbering:                        \pagenumbering.     (line 7255)
* \pageref:                              \pageref.           (line 2297)
* \pagestyle:                            \pagestyle.         (line 7280)
* \paperheight:                          Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1763)
* \paperheight <1>:                      Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1764)
* \paperwidth:                           Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1769)
* \paperwidth <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1770)
* \paragraph:                            Sectioning.         (line 1980)
* \parallel:                             Math symbols.       (line 6467)
* \parbox:                               \parbox.            (line 7714)
* \parindent:                            minipage.           (line 3443)
* \parindent <1>:                        \indent.            (line 5819)
* \parsep:                               list.               (line 3205)
* \parskip:                              \parskip.           (line 5845)
* \parskip example:                      itemize.            (line 3046)
* \part:                                 Sectioning.         (line 1974)
* \partial:                              Math symbols.       (line 6470)
* \partopsep:                            list.               (line 3214)
* \PassOptionsToClass:                   Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1077)
* \PassOptionsToPackage:                 Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1077)
* \pdfpageheight:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  737)
* \pdfpagewidth:                         Document class options.
                                                             (line  737)
* \perp:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6473)
* \phi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6478)
* \Pi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6482)
* \pi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6485)
* \pm:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6489)
* \pmod:                                 Math functions.     (line 6947)
* \poptabs:                              tabbing.            (line 3874)
* \poptabs <1>:                          tabbing.            (line 3875)
* \pounds:                               Text symbols.       (line 8917)
* \Pr:                                   Math functions.     (line 6950)
* \prec:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6492)
* \preceq:                               Math symbols.       (line 6495)
* \prime:                                Math symbols.       (line 6500)
* \printindex:                           Indexes.            (line 9421)
* \ProcessOptions:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1111)
* \ProcessOptions*:                      Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1111)
* \prod:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6509)
* \propto:                               Math symbols.       (line 6512)
* \protect:                              \protect.           (line 5348)
* \providecommand:                       \providecommand.    (line 5025)
* \ProvidesClass:                        Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1149)
* \ProvidesFile:                         Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1180)
* \ProvidesPackage:                      Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1149)
* \ps:                                   \ps.                (line 9645)
* \Psi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6515)
* \psi:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6518)
* \pushtabs:                             tabbing.            (line 3877)
* \put:                                  \put.               (line 3692)
* \qquad:                                Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7058)
* \quad:                                 Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7052)
* \quotedblbase (,,):                    Text symbols.       (line 8921)
* \quotesinglbase (,):                   Text symbols.       (line 8922)
* \r (ring accent):                      Accents.            (line 9126)
* \raggedbottom:                         \raggedbottom.      (line 1679)
* \raggedleft:                           \raggedleft.        (line 2966)
* \raggedright:                          \raggedright.       (line 2940)
* \raisebox:                             \raisebox.          (line 7757)
* \rangle:                               Math symbols.       (line 6521)
* \rbrace:                               Math symbols.       (line 6525)
* \rbrack:                               Math symbols.       (line 6529)
* \rceil:                                Math symbols.       (line 6533)
* \Re:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6536)
* \ref:                                  \ref.               (line 2318)
* \reflectbox:                           \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* \refname:                              thebibliography.    (line 4299)
* \refstepcounter:                       \refstepcounter.    (line 5630)
* \renewenvironment:                     \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
                                                             (line 5094)
* \RequirePackage:                       Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1189)
* \RequirePackageWithOptions:            Class and package commands.
                                                             (line 1189)
* \resizebox:                            \resizebox.         (line 8751)
* \restorecr:                            \obeycr & \restorecr.
                                                             (line 4544)
* \restriction:                          Math symbols.       (line 6541)
* \revemptyset:                          Math symbols.       (line 6546)
* \reversemarginpar:                     Marginal notes.     (line 5869)
* \rfloor:                               Math symbols.       (line 6551)
* \rhd:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6555)
* \rho:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6562)
* \right:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7099)
* \Rightarrow:                           Math symbols.       (line 6566)
* \rightarrow:                           Math symbols.       (line 6570)
* \rightharpoondown:                     Math symbols.       (line 6575)
* \rightharpoonup:                       Math symbols.       (line 6578)
* \rightleftharpoons:                    Math symbols.       (line 6581)
* \rightmargin:                          list.               (line 3229)
* \rm:                                   Font styles.        (line 1297)
* \rmfamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1248)
* \roman{COUNTER}:                       \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5516)
* \Roman{COUNTER}:                       \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
                                                             (line 5519)
* \rotatebox:                            \rotatebox.         (line 8658)
* \rq:                                   Text symbols.       (line 8925)
* \rule:                                 \rule.              (line 9210)
* \S:                                    Text symbols.       (line 8928)
* \savebox:                              \savebox.           (line 7773)
* \sbox:                                 \sbox.              (line 7785)
* \sc:                                   Font styles.        (line 1300)
* \scalebox:                             \scalebox.          (line 8723)
* \scriptsize:                           Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \scshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1269)
* \searrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6584)
* \sec:                                  Math functions.     (line 6953)
* \section:                              Sectioning.         (line 1977)
* \seename:                              Indexes.            (line 9413)
* \selectfont:                           Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1517)
* \setcounter:                           \setcounter.        (line 5602)
* \setlength:                            \setlength.         (line 5740)
* \setminus:                             Math symbols.       (line 6587)
* \settodepth:                           \settodepth.        (line 5762)
* \settoheight:                          \settoheight.       (line 5772)
* \settowidth:                           \settowidth.        (line 5782)
* \sf:                                   Font styles.        (line 1303)
* \sffamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1266)
* \sharp:                                Math symbols.       (line 6593)
* \shortstack:                           \shortstack.        (line 3702)
* \Sigma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6596)
* \sigma:                                Math symbols.       (line 6599)
* \signature:                            \signature.         (line 9662)
* \sim:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6603)
* \simeq:                                Math symbols.       (line 6606)
* \sin:                                  Math functions.     (line 6956)
* \sinh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6959)
* \sl:                                   Font styles.        (line 1306)
* \sloppy:                               \sloppy.            (line 4603)
* \slshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1263)
* \small:                                Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \smallint:                             Math symbols.       (line 6609)
* \smallskip:                            \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7576)
* \smallskipamount:                      \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
                                                             (line 7577)
* \smile:                                Math symbols.       (line 6613)
* \spacefactor:                          \spacefactor.       (line 7369)
* \spadesuit:                            Math symbols.       (line 6616)
* \sqcap:                                Math symbols.       (line 6619)
* \sqcup:                                Math symbols.       (line 6623)
* \sqrt[ROOT]{ARG}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7129)
* \sqsubset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6627)
* \sqsubseteq:                           Math symbols.       (line 6632)
* \sqsupset:                             Math symbols.       (line 6637)
* \sqsupseteq:                           Math symbols.       (line 6642)
* \ss (ss):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9199)
* \SS (SS):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9199)
* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}:             Math miscellany.    (line 7134)
* \star:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6646)
* \stepcounter:                          \stepcounter.       (line 5644)
* \stop:                                 Command line.       (line 9743)
* \subparagraph:                         Sectioning.         (line 1981)
* \subsection:                           Sectioning.         (line 1978)
* \subset:                               Math symbols.       (line 6653)
* \subseteq:                             Math symbols.       (line 6656)
* \subsubsection:                        Sectioning.         (line 1979)
* \succ:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6659)
* \succeq:                               Math symbols.       (line 6663)
* \sum:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6668)
* \sup:                                  Math functions.     (line 6962)
* \suppressfloats:                       Floats.             (line 1903)
* \supset:                               Math symbols.       (line 6672)
* \supseteq:                             Math symbols.       (line 6675)
* \surd:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6678)
* \swarrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6683)
* \symbol:                               Symbols by font position.
                                                             (line 8865)
* \t (tie-after accent):                 Accents.            (line 9132)
* \TAB:                                  \(SPACE) and \@.    (line 7416)
* \tabbingsep:                           tabbing.            (line 3882)
* \tabcolsep:                            tabular.            (line 4122)
* \tableofcontents:                      Tables of contents. (line 9314)
* \tan:                                  Math functions.     (line 6965)
* \tanh:                                 Math functions.     (line 6968)
* \tau:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6686)
* \telephone:                            \telephone.         (line 9686)
* \TeX:                                  Text symbols.       (line 8931)
* \textascendercompwordmark:             Text symbols.       (line 8969)
* \textasciicircum:                      Text symbols.       (line 8934)
* \textasciitilde:                       Text symbols.       (line 8937)
* \textasteriskcentered:                 Text symbols.       (line 8940)
* \textbackslash:                        Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8800)
* \textbackslash <1>:                    Text symbols.       (line 8943)
* \textbar:                              Text symbols.       (line 8946)
* \textbardbl:                           Text symbols.       (line 8949)
* \textbf:                               Font styles.        (line 1257)
* \textbigcircle:                        Text symbols.       (line 8952)
* \textbraceleft:                        Text symbols.       (line 8955)
* \textbraceright:                       Text symbols.       (line 8958)
* \textbullet:                           Text symbols.       (line 8961)
* \textcapitalcompwordmark:              Text symbols.       (line 8968)
* \textcircled{LETTER}:                  Text symbols.       (line 8964)
* \textcompwordmark:                     Text symbols.       (line 8967)
* \textcopyright:                        Text symbols.       (line 8882)
* \textdagger:                           Text symbols.       (line 8974)
* \textdaggerdbl:                        Text symbols.       (line 8977)
* \textdollar (or \$):                   Text symbols.       (line 8980)
* \textellipsis:                         Text symbols.       (line 8906)
* \textemdash (or ---):                  Text symbols.       (line 8983)
* \textendash (or --):                   Text symbols.       (line 8986)
* \texteuro:                             Text symbols.       (line 8989)
* \textexclamdown (or !`):               Text symbols.       (line 8992)
* \textfloatsep:                         Floats.             (line 1939)
* \textfloatsep <1>:                     Floats.             (line 1940)
* \textfraction:                         Floats.             (line 1918)
* \textfraction <1>:                     Floats.             (line 1919)
* \textgreater:                          Text symbols.       (line 8995)
* \textheight:                           Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1775)
* \textheight <1>:                       Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1776)
* \textit:                               Font styles.        (line 1251)
* \textleftarrow:                        Text symbols.       (line 9001)
* \textless:                             Text symbols.       (line 8998)
* \textmd:                               Font styles.        (line 1254)
* \textnormal:                           Font styles.        (line 1275)
* \textordfeminine:                      Text symbols.       (line 9004)
* \textordmasculine:                     Text symbols.       (line 9005)
* \textparagraph:                        Text symbols.       (line 8914)
* \textperiodcentered:                   Text symbols.       (line 9008)
* \textquestiondown (or ?`):             Text symbols.       (line 9011)
* \textquotedblleft (or ``):             Text symbols.       (line 9014)
* \textquotedblright (or ''):            Text symbols.       (line 9017)
* \textquoteleft (or `):                 Text symbols.       (line 9020)
* \textquoteright (or '):                Text symbols.       (line 9023)
* \textquotesingle:                      Text symbols.       (line 9026)
* \textquotestraightbase:                Text symbols.       (line 9029)
* \textquotestraightdblbase:             Text symbols.       (line 9030)
* \textregistered:                       Text symbols.       (line 9033)
* \textrightarrow:                       Text symbols.       (line 9036)
* \textrm:                               Font styles.        (line 1248)
* \textsc:                               Font styles.        (line 1269)
* \textsf:                               Font styles.        (line 1266)
* \textsl:                               Font styles.        (line 1263)
* \textsterling:                         Text symbols.       (line 8918)
* \textthreequartersemdash:              Text symbols.       (line 9039)
* \texttrademark:                        Text symbols.       (line 9042)
* \texttt:                               Font styles.        (line 1272)
* \texttwelveudash:                      Text symbols.       (line 9045)
* \textunderscore:                       Text symbols.       (line 9048)
* \textup:                               Font styles.        (line 1260)
* \textvisiblespace:                     Text symbols.       (line 9051)
* \textwidth:                            Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1783)
* \textwidth <1>:                        Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1784)
* \th (th):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9203)
* \TH (TH):                              Additional Latin letters.
                                                             (line 9203)
* \thanks{TEXT}:                         \maketitle.         (line 7244)
* \theta:                                Math symbols.       (line 6689)
* \thicklines:                           \thicklines.        (line 3640)
* \thickspace:                           Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7036)
* \thinlines:                            \thinlines.         (line 3647)
* \thinspace:                            Spacing in math mode.
                                                             (line 7045)
* \thinspace <1>:                        \thinspace.         (line 7486)
* \thispagestyle:                        \thispagestyle.     (line 7316)
* \tilde:                                Math accents.       (line 7011)
* \times:                                Math symbols.       (line 6693)
* \tiny:                                 Font sizes.         (line 1371)
* \title{TEXT}:                          \maketitle.         (line 7248)
* \to:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6697)
* \today:                                \today.             (line 9229)
* \top:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6701)
* \topfraction:                          Floats.             (line 1923)
* \topfraction <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1924)
* \topmargin:                            Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1807)
* \topsep:                               list.               (line 3234)
* \topskip:                              Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1814)
* \topskip <1>:                          Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1815)
* \totalheight:                          Predefined lengths. (line 5798)
* \triangle:                             Math symbols.       (line 6706)
* \triangleleft:                         Math symbols.       (line 6709)
* \triangleright:                        Math symbols.       (line 6715)
* \tt:                                   Font styles.        (line 1309)
* \ttfamily:                             Font styles.        (line 1272)
* \twocolumn:                            \twocolumn.         (line 1548)
* \typein:                               \typein.            (line 9701)
* \typeout:                              \typeout.           (line 9715)
* \u (breve accent):                     Accents.            (line 9137)
* \unboldmath:                           Math formulas.      (line 5924)
* \underbar:                             Accents.            (line 9140)
* \underbrace{MATH}:                     Math miscellany.    (line 7138)
* \underline{TEXT}:                      Math miscellany.    (line 7142)
* \unitlength:                           picture.            (line 3464)
* \unlhd:                                Math symbols.       (line 6721)
* \unrhd:                                Math symbols.       (line 6728)
* \Uparrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6735)
* \uparrow:                              Math symbols.       (line 6739)
* \Updownarrow:                          Math symbols.       (line 6743)
* \updownarrow:                          Math symbols.       (line 6748)
* \upharpoonright:                       Math symbols.       (line 6753)
* \uplus:                                Math symbols.       (line 6758)
* \upshape:                              Font styles.        (line 1260)
* \Upsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6765)
* \upsilon:                              Math symbols.       (line 6768)
* \usebox:                               \usebox.            (line 7797)
* \usecounter:                           \usecounter.        (line 5547)
* \usefont:                              Low-level font commands.
                                                             (line 1525)
* \usepackage:                           Additional packages.
                                                             (line  802)
* \v (breve accent):                     Accents.            (line 9148)
* \value:                                \value.             (line 5573)
* \vanothing:                            Math symbols.       (line 6776)
* \varepsilon:                           Math symbols.       (line 6771)
* \varphi:                               Math symbols.       (line 6781)
* \varpi:                                Math symbols.       (line 6785)
* \varrho:                               Math symbols.       (line 6789)
* \varsigma:                             Math symbols.       (line 6793)
* \vartheta:                             Math symbols.       (line 6797)
* \vdash:                                Math symbols.       (line 6801)
* \vdots:                                Math miscellany.    (line 7147)
* \vec:                                  Math accents.       (line 7014)
* \vector:                               \vector.            (line 3721)
* \vee:                                  Math symbols.       (line 6805)
* \verb:                                 \verb.              (line 4465)
* \Vert:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6810)
* \vert:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6826)
* \vfill:                                \vfill.             (line 7584)
* \vline:                                \vline.             (line 4214)
* \vspace:                               \vspace.            (line 7610)
* \wedge:                                Math symbols.       (line 6844)
* \widehat:                              Math accents.       (line 7017)
* \widetilde:                            Math accents.       (line 7020)
* \width:                                Predefined lengths. (line 5792)
* \wp:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6848)
* \wr:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6851)
* \Xi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6854)
* \xi:                                   Math symbols.       (line 6857)
* \year:                                 \day \month \year.  (line 5651)
* \zeta:                                 Math symbols.       (line 6860)
* \[:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5911)
* \\ (for center):                       center.             (line 2477)
* \\ (for eqnarray):                     eqnarray.           (line 2767)
* \\ (for flushright):                   flushright.         (line 2959)
* \\ (for \shortstack objects):          \shortstack.        (line 3716)
* \\ (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3827)
* \\ for flushleft:                      flushleft.          (line 2933)
* \\ for letters:                        Letters.            (line 9483)
* \\ for tabular:                        tabular.            (line 3985)
* \\ for verse:                          verse.              (line 4493)
* \\ for \author:                        \maketitle.         (line 7235)
* \\ for \title:                         \maketitle.         (line 7249)
* \\ force line break:                   \\.                 (line 4512)
* \\* (for eqnarray):                    eqnarray.           (line 2775)
* \]:                                    Math formulas.      (line 5911)
* \^:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8800)
* \^ (circumflex accent):                Accents.            (line 9084)
* \_:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \` (grave accent):                     Accents.            (line 9088)
* \` (tabbing):                          tabbing.            (line 3854)
* \{:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \|:                                    Math symbols.       (line 5984)
* \}:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8793)
* \~:                                    Reserved characters.
                                                             (line 8800)
* \~ (tilde accent):                     Accents.            (line 9094)
* ^:                                     Subscripts & superscripts.
                                                             (line 5938)
* _:                                     Subscripts & superscripts.
                                                             (line 5938)
* {...} for required arguments:          LaTeX command syntax.
                                                             (line  486)
* a4paper option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* a5paper option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* abstract environment:                  abstract.           (line 2357)
* array environment:                     array.              (line 2403)
* article class:                         Document classes.   (line  674)
* b5paper option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* book class:                            Document classes.   (line  674)
* bottomnumber:                          Floats.             (line 1946)
* bottomnumber <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1947)
* bp:                                    Units of length.    (line 5704)
* cc:                                    Units of length.    (line 5717)
* center environment:                    center.             (line 2469)
* clock option to slides class:          Document class options.
                                                             (line  796)
* cm:                                    Units of length.    (line 5708)
* dbltopnumber:                          Floats.             (line 1950)
* dbltopnumber <1>:                      Floats.             (line 1951)
* dd:                                    Units of length.    (line 5714)
* description environment:               description.        (line 2544)
* displaymath environment:               displaymath.        (line 2597)
* displaymath environment <1>:           Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* document environment:                  document.           (line 2639)
* draft option:                          Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* dvipdfmx command:                      Output files.       (line  393)
* dvips command:                         Output files.       (line  393)
* dvitype command:                       Output files.       (line  393)
* em:                                    Units of length.    (line 5722)
* enumerate environment:                 enumerate.          (line 2677)
* environment, abstract:                 abstract.           (line 2357)
* environment, array:                    array.              (line 2403)
* environment, center:                   center.             (line 2469)
* environment, description:              description.        (line 2544)
* environment, displaymath:              displaymath.        (line 2597)
* environment, displaymath <1>:          Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* environment, document:                 document.           (line 2639)
* environment, enumerate:                enumerate.          (line 2677)
* environment, eqnarray:                 eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* environment, equation:                 equation.           (line 2800)
* environment, equation <1>:             Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* environment, figure:                   figure.             (line 2823)
* environment, filecontents:             filecontents.       (line 2876)
* environment, filecontents*:            filecontents.       (line 2876)
* environment, flushleft:                flushleft.          (line 2927)
* environment, flushright:               flushright.         (line 2953)
* environment, itemize:                  itemize.            (line 2979)
* environment, letter:                   letter.             (line 3062)
* environment, list:                     list.               (line 3067)
* environment, math:                     math.               (line 3420)
* environment, math <1>:                 Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* environment, minipage:                 minipage.           (line 3432)
* environment, picture:                  picture.            (line 3460)
* environment, quotation:                quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* environment, quote:                    quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* environment, tabbing:                  tabbing.            (line 3768)
* environment, table:                    table.              (line 3915)
* environment, tabular:                  tabular.            (line 3957)
* environment, thebibliography:          thebibliography.    (line 4279)
* environment, theorem:                  theorem.            (line 4395)
* environment, titlepage:                titlepage.          (line 4408)
* environment, verbatim:                 verbatim.           (line 4447)
* environment, verse:                    verse.              (line 4482)
* eqnarray environment:                  eqnarray.           (line 2744)
* equation environment:                  equation.           (line 2800)
* equation environment <1>:              Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* etex command:                          TeX engines.        (line  441)
* ex:                                    Units of length.    (line 5722)
* executivepaper option:                 Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* figure environment:                    figure.             (line 2823)
* filecontents environment:              filecontents.       (line 2876)
* filecontents* environment:             filecontents.       (line 2876)
* final option:                          Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* first-latex-doc document:              About this document.
                                                             (line  318)
* fleqn option:                          Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* flushleft environment:                 flushleft.          (line 2927)
* flushright environment:                flushright.         (line 2953)
* <http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/> home page: About this document.
                                                             (line  291)
* in:                                    Units of length.    (line 5701)
* inch:                                  Units of length.    (line 5701)
* itemize environment:                   itemize.            (line 2979)
* landscape option:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* latex command:                         Output files.       (line  393)
* latex-doc-ptr document:                About this document.
                                                             (line  315)
* <latexrefman@tug.org> email address:   About this document.
                                                             (line  302)
* legalpaper option:                     Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* leqno option:                          Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* letter class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
* letter environment:                    letter.             (line 3062)
* letterpaper option:                    Document class options.
                                                             (line  716)
* list environment:                      list.               (line 3067)
* lR box:                                picture.            (line 3525)
* lrbox:                                 lrbox.              (line 7675)
* lshort document:                       About this document.
                                                             (line  326)
* lualatex command:                      TeX engines.        (line  458)
* math environment:                      math.               (line 3420)
* math environment <1>:                  Math formulas.      (line 5901)
* minipage environment:                  minipage.           (line 3432)
* mm:                                    Units of length.    (line 5711)
* mu:                                    Units of length.    (line 5733)
* notitlepage option:                    Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* onecolumn option:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* oneside option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* openany option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* openbib option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* openright option:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* pc:                                    Units of length.    (line 5698)
* pdflatex command:                      Output files.       (line  403)
* picture environment:                   picture.            (line 3460)
* pt:                                    Units of length.    (line 5694)
* quotation environment:                 quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* quote environment:                     quotation and quote.
                                                             (line 3732)
* report class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
* secnumdepth counter:                   Sectioning.         (line 2013)
* slides class:                          Document classes.   (line  674)
* sp:                                    Units of length.    (line 5720)
* tabbing environment:                   tabbing.            (line 3768)
* table environment:                     table.              (line 3915)
* tabular environment:                   tabular.            (line 3957)
* textcomp package:                      Text symbols.       (line 8877)
* thebibliography environment:           thebibliography.    (line 4279)
* theorem environment:                   theorem.            (line 4395)
* titlepage environment:                 titlepage.          (line 4408)
* titlepage option:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  746)
* topmargin:                             Page layout parameters.
                                                             (line 1808)
* topnumber:                             Floats.             (line 1954)
* topnumber <1>:                         Floats.             (line 1955)
* totalnumber:                           Floats.             (line 1958)
* totalnumber <1>:                       Floats.             (line 1959)
* twocolumn option:                      Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* twoside option:                        Document class options.
                                                             (line  775)
* usrguide official documentation:       About this document.
                                                             (line  321)
* verbatim environment:                  verbatim.           (line 4447)
* verse environment:                     verse.              (line 4482)
* xdvi command:                          Output files.       (line  393)
* xdvipdfmx:                             TeX engines.        (line  467)
* xelatex command:                       TeX engines.        (line  467)